Home

Avaya BCM 2.5 Installation and Maintenance Manual

1. Installation and Maintenance Guide 162 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems RPI Output Connections Feed the output pairs in through the bottom of the RPI and route the pairs to the output connectors Figure 62 shows how to route the output pairs If you use one pair to power a base station connect the power pair to PWR 1 and PWR 1 If you use two pairs to power a base station connect one pair to PWR 1 and PWR 1 and the second pair to PWR 2 and PWR 2 Caution Ensure both pairs have the same polarity If you connect two power pairs with opposite polarities you can damage the base station and RPI Figure 62 Output connector pinout RPI Input Connections Feed the TCM input pairs from the Business Communications Manager distribution frame through the top of the RPI and route them to the input connectors IBIX1 to IBIX4 Figure 63 shows how to route the input pairs The maximum number of input pairs in an RPI installation is 16 Table 39 lists the pinout and signal references Figure 63 Input connector pinout Pin7 Pin5 Pin3 Pin Y v Y v SULT A A A A Pin8 Pin Pin4 Pin2 IBIXn P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 163 Table 39 Input wiring IBIX1 1 2 TCM 1 OBIX1 TCM 3 OBIX3
2. Installation and Maintenance Guide 154 Chapter 11 Installing Telephones and Peripherals Moving Telephones You can move an Business Communications Manager telephone to a new location within the system without losing its programmed settings if the telephone has been enabled with Set relocation When you enable Set relocation automatic telephone relocation the internal numbers autodial settings and personal speed dial codes remain with the telephone when you disconnect the telephone However if you connect a different telephone to the jack before you reconnect the moved telephone the new telephone takes the programmed settings The Business Communications Manager system can no longer identify the old telephone After you plug a moved set into a new jack the Business Communications Manager system can take 45 seconds to identify the telephone Programming relocation takes three minutes to complete Wait for this to occur before you change any settings for the telephone in the system Warning If you disconnect a relocated telephone before the relocation programming is A complete the telephone can lose the programmed settings Note Automatic telephone relocation is disabled by default gt P0937235 02 1 155 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems This chapter describes th
3. o RE g 3 5 8 3 E m m o 00000000000 iig eo o 000 g a000 B a ale gg ole w 9 media bay module latches o eC Je oC Doj fe O Beco ee O 0 0 O O Business Communications Manager base unit 5 i O O O O O 0 000 O o w Ce o M o000 8 3 fol o Business Communications Manager expansion unit Installation and Maintenance Guide 118 Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules 5 With the face of the module facing towards yourself insert the media bay module into the open bay 6 Push the media bay module into the unit You will hear a click when the module is firmly seated in the media bay Note The module sits slightly forward from the face of the Business Communications Manager When the front bezel is replaced the module face is flush with the surface of the unit 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 for each media bay module you want to install 8 Replace the front bezel on the base unit or expansion unit Reconnecting the Equipment After you install the module correctly into the bay you must return the equipment to operation in an orderly way Follow these steps carefully to ensure that you return your system to operation without endangering the equipment or yourself 1 Plug the power cords for the Business Communications Manager base unit and the expansion unit if there is one back into
4. E LA o3 Mounting keyhole slots Determining the ATA 2 extension number You must determine the extension number for every Business Communications Manager ATA 2 before you can perform administration 1 Connect a single line telephone to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 2 Lift the handset 3 If you do not hear dial tone press Link 9 to access an intercom line Note Link appears as Recall on some telephones If you are using a telephone without a Link or Recall button refer to the ATA 2 User Guide for details Some phones have a Flash button which is the equivalent to Link or Recall 4 Dial the extension number of an Business Communications Manager telephone with a display If you hear a busy signal repeat steps 3 and 4 using a different extension number When the telephone rings the display shows Set lt nn gt calling The number that appears on the display is the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 extension number Record the extension number Note The Automatic Set Relocation feature works with Business Communications Manager ATA 2 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 189 Configuring the ATA 2 Configure the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 using Business Communications Manager Unified Manager For detailed
5. P0937235 02 1 Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard Disk 211 Figure 93 Hard disk screw locations 2 5 version hardware Power supply Oe E o a I OR 5 Lift the hard disk out of the unit 6 Remove the screws that fasten the brackets to the hard disk Refer to Figure 94 Figure 94 Remove the brackets from the hard disk Single disk bracket Note If you are returning the hard disk to a Nortel Networks repair facility package it carefully in the replacement hard disk box If you do not have the original box package the drive in another box with shock absorbing material Installation and Maintenance Guide 212 Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard Disk Installing a New Hard Disk This section describes what you need to do to install a new hard disk into the Business Communications Manager base unit Warning You must initialize the Business Communications Manager system when you AN install a new hard disk on a single disk system Mounti
6. 1 Push against the bottom 2 Pull out from the top Restarting the System When you finish your maintenance procedures restart the Business Communications Manager system in the order described in this section Restoring the System to Operation To restore the system to operation after a maintenance session follow these steps 1 Ensure that all cables inside the housing are connected snuggly to the correct boards and excess cable bundled neatly out of the way Put the bezel back on the base unit or expansion unit if you removed it Put the lid back on the unit and replace the screws If you removed the base unit from the rack or wall replace it Plug the expansion unit if there is one back into the ac power source O a A W N Plug the base unit back into the ac power source P0937235 02 1 Chapter 16 Preparing Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 207 The Business Communications Manager automatically starts booting Warning When you restart the system all IP clients voice mail and VoIP ports are not A available until the system services restart 7 Replace all the connectors to the front of the units The reboot can take up to 10 minutes Software Restart If you did not shut the system power down restart the software 1 Refer to Shutting Down the System Software until you get to step 7 2 Atthis point select Reboot on the Lo
7. e Business Communications g oie Ol Manager base unit 5 oo00 33 F 5 oe ood oO Es O TARE o Valls O o O e Business Communications Manager expansion unit DS256 port g P DS256 port Installation and Maintenance Guide 50 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Figure 10 Installation Process Overview Figure 10 provides an overview of the installation process described in this book Select the media bay modules you require and optional expansion unit Set the media bay module switches Install the media bay modules Power up the base and expansion units Installation and initialization overview The number of telephone lines and extensions you have determines the number and type of media bay modules you need For instructions about how to select the media bay modules refer to Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit on page 79 The Business Communications Manager base unit performs the main computing tasks It contains the telephony and data networking components For instructions about how to install the base unit refer to Chapter 6 Installing the Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit on page 89
8. 6 Insert two 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws in the other two slotted holes 7 Insert a 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screw in one of the unslotted holes 8 Tighten all five screws P0937235 02 1 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit 87 Installing the Base Unit on a Flat Surface You can install the Business Communications Manager base unit on any flat surface that can support the weight of the unit Caution Refer to Environment Checklist on page 79 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the Business Communications Manager base unit To install the Business Communications Manager base unit on a table or shelf 1 Attach four rubber feet to the corners on the bottom of the base unit 2 Position the base unit on the table or shelf Make sure you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables and media bay modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 88 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit P0937235 02 1 89 Chapter 6 Installing the Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit This chapter describes how to install the Business Communications Manager expansion unit The Business Communications Manager expansion unit must be installed close enough to the base unit that the 5 m 16 ft cable between the two units can be connected to t
9. Installation and Maintenance Guide 250 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware Removing the Clock Calendar Battery This section explains how to correctly remove the clock calendar battery 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting Down the System Software on page 204 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shutting Down the System Hardware on page 204 3 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Use your finger to carefully lift the battery out of the socket For the location of the battery socket refer to Figure 132 Caution Do not use any type of tool to remove the battery Figure 132 Removing the clock calendar battery H I The battery is located under the edge of the power supply Front of unit P0937235 02 1 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and P
10. Table 14 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 14 DTM switch settings North American PRI Select DS30 Enter these switch settings To assign channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 these lines 2 on jon fon fon fon fon 211 233 on jon fon jon jon 3 fott _ 181 203 on jon fon jon on 4 151 173 Pa aes 5 on on on on 121 143 Installation and Maintenance Guide 102 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings Table 14 DTM switch settings North American PRI Continued Enter these switch settings To assign 1 2 3 4 5 6 these lines Ue wm Table 15 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 15 DTM switch settings E1 and UK PRI Enter these switch settings To assign 2 3 4 5 6 these lines 211 240 181 210 151 180 121 150 91 120 61 90 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 103 BRI Switch Settings You can install a maximum of three BRI modules per DS30 channel on the offsets indicated below Table 16 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 16 BRI switch settings Select Enier these switch settings To assign offset 4 2 3 4 5 e these lines 0 on on on on on on 911 218 1 219 226 2 22
11. 177 Install the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada 179 Install the lightning surge protector Canada 180 R451 connectors on the DECT media bay module 181 Insertion Loss from the CO to the single line telephone 184 Single line telephone installation overview 0 0 0005 186 ATA 2 POOU 0c262dtcieerd idee reer ieed dene eeaeee snes and 186 PUPS ITO VIGVE ao cence pada d AERE ep Rei OR ae Sa dom a eke tee a 187 FURL S DECK VIE lt r tours tke eeNeRe T E T TEETE 188 Data communication device installation overview 191 Auxillary nger jack us 2 kot ee eee eis bed a ert es ae ew hed 193 PRINS WIE FIC og oes ti hae MEARE EOKS RES RESETS eee 194 Palle Play CK 23 2 cade ea ee dene deed Rissa eao oR E oma 195 P0937235 02 1 Figures 25 Figure 83 Musicon hold jack 224 2000 ceeeec seen ceeedeee ed eeew eee setis 196 Figure 84 SSM board connections 25 6 ccs cd en wees dead ee sedans ease ees 198 Figure 85 LED locations on the face of the base unit 2 004 199 Figure 86 System Status Monitor LED Display screen 4 199 Figure 87 System Status Monitor LED Settings record 200 Figure 88 Preparing for maintenance overview 2000 n ee eee 203 Figura 89 Remove the top cover 2 2 04 662ec ced ak edw ee eee d eb eden stis 205 Figure 90 Removing the front bezel 0 0 ce ee
12. Caution Refer to Environment Checklist on page 79 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the Business Communications Manager expansion unit Required equipment e a wall mounting bracket supplied with the expansion unit e two 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws e aplywood backboard 2 cm 3 4 in thick Follow these steps to mount the expansion unit on wall 1 Install the 2 cm 3 4 in plywood backboard on the wall Note If the backboard for the Business Communications Manager base unit has enough room for the expansion unit you do not require a second backboard 2 Choose a location on the backboard that is level and leaves enough space on the sides 23 cm or 9 in to insert and remove the media bay modules 3 Use the slotted holes on the wall mounting bracket to mark the location for the two mounting screws 4 Screw two 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in screws into the backboard leaving 6 mm 1 4 in of the two screws showing 5 Align the screw holes between the expansion unit and the wall mounting bracket 6 Fasten the wall mounting bracket using four screws Refer to Figure 34 Figure 34 Attaching the wall mounting bracket to the expansion unit Ly Installation and Maintenance Guide 92 Chapter 6 Installing the Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit Caution Use only the screws supplied with the wall mounting bracke
13. information stored on the disk Caution Do not use an electric screwdriver near the hard disk You can lose the Shock can damage the hard disk Do not drop or hit the hard disk drive Removing the Hard Disk When a hard disk is causing problems or fails you must remove the unit from the Business Communications Manager server cabinet The following steps describe that process 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system by following the instructions in Shutting Down the System Software on page 204 Otherwise skip to step 2 Set up the server for maintenance as described in Shutting Down the System Hardware on page 204 Inside the server disconnect the power supply wiring and ribbon cable from the hard disk connectors Remove the four screws holding the hard disk bracket to the Business Communications Manager base unit box Refer to Figure 92 and Figure 93 on page 211 Figure 92 Hard disk wiring and screw locations 2 0 hardware Power supply Ce O Ena GEG olf e 9 os
14. 0000 eee eee eee 58 Basic Rate Interface Media Bay Module 0 eee ee eee eee 59 Station Media Bay WOU ara taro rarata nioi emade d tei ssaeieseeeareeee 4 60 Digital Station Media Bay Module 0 000 e eee eee 60 4X16 Media Bay MOQUE pind giaapeaaeeheah eee eae eure ERAT 61 Analog Station Media Bay Module 00 0c cece eee eee 62 Specialized Media Bay Modules 0 000 ccc teens 63 DECT Media Bay Module 2 iccccscdadw senate cddeedareauveecaaneudaes 63 DECT DIP SWICNOS ose tania tne Rae TRA ORE Rhee RAM RA ACR A 64 Fiber Expansion Media Bay Module 0 0c e eee eee eee 64 Telephones and Adapters 22 scccceve reer eden eden ede ed eeA eee eee eee 65 Companion System Componenis ca dvidawawaadeada Wawa wawdwwwwwwaws 66 DECT System Components 2 200604402 ces sede canes cadet enaeedawaes 67 Chapter 3 Auxiliary RequirementS 000 cece eee 69 Computer Specifications 5 3cio5 v 84 5368s 1 KRDN ICR r dorr dadre ddar darraa 69 Browser Reg irememis 25 c6x navn dike Eek SAGER AEE ERA dR eRs 69 Preloading Java class Files On Your Workstation 00000 eee 70 Optimizing Unified Manager Speed 0 c cee eee 70 Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System 71 Selecting the Trunk Media Bay Modules 0 000 c cence eee eee 72 Selecting the Station Media Bay Modules 0 00 cece eee eee eee 73 P0937235
15. 0 00000 ee 190 Installing a Data Communication Device 0 0c eee 191 Chapter 14 Installing Optional Telephony Equipment 0 20eee0e 193 Auxiliary RINE sccccc deh ed i hake eR Se Reka d aed dake deen ade sie aeh lt d devs 193 Auxiliary Ringer Programming si sce esos bd otek Cow ie ed deme duas 193 External Paging SYSTEM dgakecades ene ed oder edaeeadap ieeaenadeddaneawes 194 Connecting the Paging System 0 20 eee 194 External MUS Me GOUNE shisha cris totes Raced 8 Sh i dace ia nde real ie as ale iki 195 Music on Hold Specifications ioioscrsrrroreisir trendni iirin p Eai ee 195 Connecting the External Music Source sssaa annaa aaea 196 External Music Source Programming sa sasaaa 196 Chapter 15 TROUDIGSROOUNG dsc ctccce eck devesu cde ccs diavdacivesscesnedsed 197 Using the System Status Monitor to Monitor LEDs 2020005 198 Emergency Telephone Does Not Function 000 0c eee eee eens 200 AIA 2 Does Not FUNCHON cccceavceasserorrerererenetan eet eererene sous 201 Checking the Wii 22c045 lt ees6shse0dsroad eoeew gear A eed ede oe 201 Checking for Dial Tone atthe ATA 2 0 0c cee 201 Checking for Trunk Line Dial Tone to the ATA 2 0000 cece eee 201 P0937235 02 1 Contents 21 Chapter 16 Preparing Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 5 203 Spoil TOs t ois redder dees Dead deaeh MALATE ERE RAND OMA DBA EER 203 Shutt
16. Media Bay Module Common Features Media bay modules are designed within a common casing which includes the following common features LEDs All media bay modules have power and status LEDS Figure 12 shows the location of the O Power and Status on a CTM These LEDs are located in the same place on all modules Table 3 describes the possible LED states Table 3 Module Power and Status LED states Off Off No power applied to the module or failure of module power converter On Off FPGA not downloaded On Blinking Hardware is working but there is an operational problem such as e no DS256 link detected e DS256 frame alignment lost e bandwidth not allocated e module is in maintenance state Power LED Status LED Blinking Blinking Power is applied to module but there is a hardware problem such as e partial failure of power converter e thermal overload e fan failure On On The module is read to operate P0937235 02 1 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware 55 Power Connections The back of the modules have a single connector that provides a DS256 channel and power to the module These connectors plug into the back of the media bay on the Business Communications Manager base unit or expansion unit in the same way with all modules Some modules also have a cooling fan that runs off the module power source Figure 13 shows the rear views of the two types of mod
17. same features one line display one line display eight display with three IP telephone Norstar M7100 Norstar M7208 Norstar M7310 Norstar M7324 memory buttons memory buttons 12 dual memory Options two Business Series Terminal T7208 memory buttons with indicators Business Communications Manager i2004 connects through a computer based internet link It can be used to call through VoIP or PBX lines one line display eight memory buttons with indicators Norstar M7208N UK and Australia only same features two line display with three display buttons 24 with indicators CAP modules Norstar M7324N UK and Australia only same features Installation and Maintenance Guide 66 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware Central answering position CAP North American systems only connects to an M7324 telephone and provides 48 additional memory buttons You need one Station Auxiliary Power Supply SAPS for every M7324 telephone that has CAP modules Central answering position CAPN UK and Australia only same features connects to M7324N telephones Companion region specific provides twinning capability between a stationary set and a wireless mobile set This system has three hardware components which are described in Companion System Components on page 66 DECT region specific provides cordless access to the system through
18. e292000000000 B 1 234 5 1 MO Business Communications Manager 00 0 Temperature Fan Table 46 describes the possible states of the fan and temperature LEDs Table 46 Fan and temperature LEDs on the server LED Label Description Green LED On Red LED On Only Temperature Temperature is below threshold Temperature is in alarm status l One of the problems could be that one of the fans has failed Fans All installed fans are working There is a problem with a minimum of o one fan Removing a Fan from the Base Unit The Business Communications Manager base unit can have one or two fans If the base unit has two fans before you shut down the system determine which fan has failed 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting Down the System Software on page 204 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shutting Down the System Hardware on page 204 3 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Remove the fan cable from wherever it is connected P0937235 02 1 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan 219 Refer to Figure 101 and Figure 102 on page 220 Figure 101 Remove the fan cable from motherboard pre 2 5 c
19. Digital and analog telephones must not be installed on any connections not protected by building equipment Analog Terminal Adapter The Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to a digital line connector on the Business Communications Manager system Refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 183 for the requirements and procedure for installing the device Installation and Maintenance Guide 148 Chapter 11 Installing Telephones and Peripherals Central Answering Position CAP The Central Answering Position CAP module connects to an M7324 telephone The module provides 48 additional memory buttons For installation procedures for the CAP refer to the installation documents that came with the CAP Telephone Port and DN Cross reference The media bay module the analog and digital telephones are connected to dictates DNs and port numbers Use Table 34 to identify which port your telephones are connected to For future reference put a checkmark beside the ports where there are sets installed Note The following table is based on a system with three digit DNs with a start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs the system automatically adds a 2 for each additional DN length unit i e 221 becomes 2221 Appendix B Media Bay Module Combinations on page 269 contains a blank table to use if you changed the start DN on you
20. Return to Menu Part No P0937235 02 1 Business Communications Manager 2 5 Installation and Maintenance Guide RTEL NETWORKS 2 Copyright 2001 Nortel Networks All rights reserved June 2001 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc Trademarks NORTEL NETWORKS is a trademark of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners North American Regulatory Information Safety Business Communications Manager equipment meets all applicable requirements of both the CSA C22 2 No 950 95 and UL 1950 Edition 3 A Danger Risk of shock Read and follow installation instructions carefully Ensure the Business Communications Manager and Business Communications Manager expansion cabinet are unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the Business Communications Manager or Business Communications Manager expansion cabinet I
21. Ring Auxiliary relay output oO Tip Auxiliary relay output O O 0 Sleeve Ground Warning The auxiliary ringer must not be connected to exposed plant The ringer must not draw more than 50 mA from a 40 V DC source Auxiliary Ringer Programming You can activate the auxiliary ringer by setting auxiliary ring for specific external lines and Business Communications Manager telephones Refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide for programming details Installation and Maintenance Guide 194 Chapter 14 Installing Optional Telephony Equipment External Paging System customer supplied You can connect an external paging system to provide paging over external loudspeakers Ensure the paging system follows these guidelines e The paging output from the MSC is 100 mV rms across an input impedance of 600 Q e The output level is 0 dBm0 with reference to 600 ohms for a PCM encoded signal at 0 dBm There is no dc voltage across the page output terminals e The page output uses the tip and ring terminals of the jack The sleeve terminal of the jack connects to ground You must use a stereo plug to connect the page signal output When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay jack which contains a floating relay contact pair The system uses this jack to control the external paging amplifier e The contact pair
22. communicate through radio base stations connected to the DECT module Note The DECT cordless handset can be configured to act as a separate set either providing a point for target line calls or with full call and receive capability although some of the features are not available The handset can also be twinned with desk sets to provide mobile coverage of one or more stationary sets This set has no memory buttons DECT system installation and configuration information is contained in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 68 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware P0937235 02 1 69 Chapter 3 Auxiliary Requirements You require a personal computer to run the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager application This application is used to configure and manage the Business Communications Manager system For the easiest administration you also require an internet connection with the correct browser setup This chapter describes the computer and internet specifications Computer Specifications These are the minimum computer specifications you need to run the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager e 133 MHz Pentium CPU or compatible e 64MB RAM e 10 MB disk space available e screen resolution of 1024 x 768 e monitor large enough to support the screen resolution suggested size 17 inches e operating s
23. An internal line can connect you with an external caller if you use it to access a line pool Also you can answer an external caller using the call handling features such as Call Park or Call Pickup Directed Installation and Maintenance Guide 282 Glossary Internet Protocol IP The protocol that supports data being sent from one computer to another through an interconnection internet of networks IP is a connectionless protocol which means that there is no established connection between the end points that are communicating IP address The internally assigned address that identifies a destination and transmitting computer over a internet See also static IP address and dynamic IP address IP address server The IP address server manages the assignment of IP addresses to the devices that access the system The server assigns an IP address to the device whenever it logs on to the network ISDN DN A directory number DN used by ISDN terminal equipment connected to the system The Business Communications Manager system uses a maximum of 30 ISDN DNs The DECT cordless handsets use this type of DN kbyte The abbreviation for kilobyte A kilobyte is equal to 1024 bytes keycode These numerical codes generated for specific applications and for individual sites allow access to additional features on the Business Communications Manager system Refer to the Software Keycode Installation guide for details line The co
24. If your system requires more than three media bay modules you must install a Business Communications Manager expansion unit For instructions about how to install the expansion unit refer to Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings on page 95 Before you install the media bay modules you must set the switches on the back of the modules to select the DS30 channel the modules will use to access lines and extensions DNs For instructions about how to set the switches refer to Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules on page 115 After you have set the switches install the media bay modules into the base unit or the expansion unit For instructions about how to install the media bay modules refer to Chapter 9 Starting the System on page 121 When you have the main hardware connected start the system to ensure the first level of hardware and software is working For instructions about how to correctly start the units refer to Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules on page 137 Continued on next page P0937235 02 1 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 51 Installation overview continued networking equipment Initialize the system Connect the telephony components Install optional mobile equipment system and set configurations The data networking components of the Business Communications Manager system provide network connection to your
25. activity to the disk drive Indicates condition of all monitored in startup N A not all services are O system status services are shutodown mode working functioning 1 PCI Device Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not WAN Port 1 and the driver is present active 2 PCI Device Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not WAN Port 2 and the driver is present active 3 PCI Device Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not and the driver is present active Installation and Maintenance Guide 124 Chapter 9 Starting the System Table 24 Business Communications Manager base unit LED states Continued 4 PCI Device Device is present driver is not running N A Device is not and the driver is present active Temperature Temperature is N A Temperature is N A below threshold in alarm status 1 If the Power LED does not light a Disconnect the power cords b Check all cables and power connections Ensure that the ac outlet has power c Reconnect the power cords 2 When the system power is on and the system has successfully booted the power and status LEDs on the faceplates of the media bay modules are lit and remain constant Figure 45 shows an example of a media bay module and the LEDs on the module faceplate Figure 45 Module power and status LEDs All modules have a Table 25 Module power and status LED states Indicates state Check for hardware a minimum
26. c If the product housing has been damaged d If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Caution To eliminate the possibility of accidental damage to cords plugs jacks and the telephone do not use sharp instruments during the assembly procedures Warning Do not insert the plug at the free end of the handset cord directly into a wall or baseboard jack Such misuse can result in unsafe sound levels or possible damage to the handset P0937235 02 1 11 16 Save these instructions International Regulatory Information CE The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with the following This device conforms to Directive 1999 5 EC on Radio V Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment as adopted by the European Parliament And Of The Council This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Hereby Nortel Networks declares that Enterprise Edge Business Communications Manager Model No NT7B10xxxx is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Information is subject to change without notice Nortel Networks reserves the right to
27. lly E EE E N N E EEE E E N T A send oe 104 GING St hee Sete ae aaa a aa a ae a 106 dX ESWE SEWE sorcery riai a a a a ean alia ded 108 ASM 8 SWICK SOUINGS siaccceceeeaveebedineeedbeeereaveeecaneacans 109 DSM Switch SSUNGS 12 cass ceeciaaedeeedotde ec eaweed E cess 111 Media Bay Modules with Special Settings 00 20 e eee eee eee 112 DECT Switch Seting sorer csrereres distesi RES neka dhe a eee CREE Eee 112 FPEM switte SeMS oaair ai aA AENA E A E A 113 Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules 2 000 e eee eee eee eee 115 CHUNG DOWNING SYSIONY gagydees deen ae deaeedecudeeaee RAE EEA 116 Installing a Media Bay Module 224 94ic42eh4e400e debs bees sev eirata Fees 117 Re conneciing the EQuIPMIGM ices seen seh kh doe tide A ee eee 118 Replacing Media Bay Modules 0000 eee 119 Installation Replacement Troubleshooting 0 0 e eee eee 120 Chapter 9 Starting the SYGIOM oo ce ccic cde cc tes bes niaar 121 Checking Power and Wiring 000 e eee teen eee 122 Checking System Power and Status 0 00 c cece eee eee eens 123 Connecting the Data Networking Hardware 0 60 cece eee eee 125 Connecting Ne Carde srewsrsreireecesi toht usda dee eee PEeee eee ee eas 126 Connecting Wiring to the LAN Card 0 0000 e eee eee ee 126 Connect Wiring to the WAN Card 000 c eee 127 Connect Wiring to the Modem Card 0 00 eee ee 128 MERMANS CIE L a Sh ae a sil kee c
28. separate installation and maintenance guide Refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide to set up basic telephony and data configurations Refer to the separate application guides to set up optional applications such as call management or voice over IP functions Installation and Maintenance Guide 52 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager P0937235 02 1 53 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware The Business Communications Manager is a modular system You can increase the capacity of your Business Communications Manager by adding more telephony hardware components known as media bay modules The number of media bay modules that can be added to your system is determined by the number of media bays that are open combined with the number of DS30 channels each component occupies Each Business Communications Manager has a maximum of six DS30 channels available to media bay modules If your system requires many IP lines or trunks you can reduce the number of DS30 channels that are assigned to modules and increase the number of channels available to IP telephones This is called a 3 5 DS30 channel split In this case you only have five DS30 channels available to media bay modules Refer to Understanding DS30 Channel Numbers on page 75 for more information i Warning Changing the DS30 channel split If you change the channel split from 2 6 default to 3 5 after the
29. 132 Man MA Skeet eae aaa de hal ae Senin Se hart ded 133 Ethernet crossover Cable 2 ccscievesevwsevasevnsevaeeva sees 134 Trunk and station wiring overview 00 c eee eee 138 DIMRJISC WINES cecsdecgueeeeesueasdasgesennteraess 139 CTM RUT Wining anayo cereis edisti geen thee eee ees thin ee Keo 139 BRIRGSS wiring SY 66 eisud4 Pek s 845 Hed HOE KHOR GAELS 140 Wiring for DSM 16 4X16 and DSM 32 0 ene 142 Witing Tot an ASM Y 2c ccccceencecetsanierereancers dananenes 143 Overview of installing a Companion system 2 55 155 Pie OGM Castine Soca aaan A E EE ue eae 157 RPI mounting Wolke ois bad cease ed ei ade baseas dimes oS eaa dees 159 Opening the RPI COVER 6 indie ks akona ddi Loews dow 159 RPI COMpONGING e eere tanec ec eb dese eteheserwe teehee EEEE 160 RPI connector printed circuit board 00 cee eee eee 161 DUIOUD CONTECH PINO 33 cxaucaes coess desabuweaeeesuaeeeans 162 nputconnector pinout cakes eeeccseyiges deehew Sake eadeni 162 Bracket termination board oss dices lee een Viens res deme duus 168 Slide the cover on bracket 00 00 c eee e eee eee 169 Installed antenna and lightning surge protectors USA 172 Antenna with antenna bracket USA n nsun nananana aaa 173 Lightning surge protector and bracket USA 00 55 174 Indoor directional external antenna Canada 176 Indoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada
30. 142 Note Use 16 wire pairs from each connector for the DSM 32 gt Note If you are connecting an DSM 16 4X16 or DSM 32 use Table 31 on page 142 If you are connecting an ASM 8 use the Table 32 on page 143 For an overview of BIX wiring conventions refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 BIX Box Wiring Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 142 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules Table 31 and Figure 54 provide the wiring scheme for the DSM 16 4X16 and DSM 32 modules The Sets heading indicates the position of the set on the BIX block Set DNs are allocated by the Business Communications Manager based on the DS30 channel setting on the station module Table 31 DSM wiring chart Sets Sets Pin Wire color Port 1st 2nd Figure 54 Wiring for DSM 16 4X16 and DSM 32 26 White Blue X01 1 17 1 Blue White X01 1 17 Ze poirsonnedor 27 White Orange x02 l2 18 T Tip 1R 2 Orange White X02 2 18 28 White Green X03 3 19 3 Green White X03 3 19 29 White Brown X04 4 20 LAE TOEA IS 4 Brown White X04 4 20 30 White Slate X05 5 21 5 Slate White X05 5 21 31 Red Blue X06 6 22 6 Blue Red X06 6 22 32 Red Orange X07 7 23 7 Orange Red X07 7 23 33 Red Green X08 8 24 8 Green Red X08 8 24 DSM 32 34 Red Brown X09 9 25 The second 25 pair connector is 9 Brown Red X09 9 25 wired in the same sequence as the 35 Red Slate X10 10 26
31. 160 000 square meters 1 700 000 square feet when using the maximum number of base stations Companion wireless handsets Business Communications Manager supports the following wireless handsets Companion 3020 Companion C3050 Etiquette Companion C3050 CT2Plus and Companion C3060 The portable telephones used with your Business Communications Manager system are small lightweight units with complete digital performance to provide clear voice quality Companion portable telephones feature a three line 16 character alphanumeric display Administration and Maintenance Tools Programming of the Companion system is easily and quickly done through the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager You can assign portable telephones to the system check base station parameters and enable and disable registration through programming Companion Diagnostics Software allows you to run diagnostics on the wireless system You run the diagnostics using a personal computer located at the customer site or in a remote location For more information about programming Companion and running diagnostics see the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 157 Installing the Companion Hardware The Companion hardware must be in place and configured before you can use the handsets to connect to the Business Communications Manager This section describes the
32. 45 software 45 VoIP Gateway 47 knockout plate 232 L LAN card connecting with default IP address 131 Ethernet crossover cable 134 inserting card 242 installing 242 overview 40 removing 240 slot cover lock 241 wiring 126 LAN CTE overview 47 language P0937235 02 1 Index 299 by region 256 South and Central America 256 latch 117 LEDs Business Communications Manager base unit 44 fan 218 flashing 123 module troubleshooting 120 monitor at startup 118 off 123 PCI device LAN card 240 power supply 230 power supply module 234 solid green 123 218 solid red 123 218 SSM board 220 states 123 218 system status monitor 199 licence music on hold 6 lightning protector installation 171 lightning surge arrestor installation 172 installation in Canada 180 installation in U S 173 lightning surge protector 175 limitations Companion channel split 96 156 Line jack 128 line number DS30 channel range 96 line protocol by region 261 line services ISDN support by region 257 lines BRI and PRI line types 262 module DIP switch settings 101 protocol by region 261 link protocol 130 local area network card 40 lock slot cover 241 loop current 183 loop resistance 183 M7000 International only 65 M7100 North America only 65 M7100N International only 65 M7208 North America only 65 M7208N International only 65 M7310N International only 65 M7316 North America only 65 M7324
33. 69 Indoor directional external antenna Canada 2 To prevent stress on the coaxial cable fasten the cable to the mounting surface 3 Connect the antenna to the appropriate base station radio Note The coaxial cable length must not exceed 10 m 33 ft gt P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 177 Installing an Indoor Omnidirectional Antenna Canada To install an indoor omnidirectional antenna use the following guidelines e Use the bracket supplied to install the antenna on a wall or ceiling This bracket provides the necessary clearance between the floor or wall and the antenna Mount the bracket so that the external antenna is vertical The recommended installation position on a wall is halfway between the floor and the ceiling Figure 70 shows the two methods of installing the indoor omnidirectional external antenna Figure 70 Indoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada Co oxial Cable cable clamp Ceiling mount installation Wall mount installation Co axial cable Cable clamp Insert the antenna in the bracket so that the antenna is vertical Use two screws to install the bracket to the wall or ceiling To prevent cable stress on the coaxial cable fasten the cable to the mounting surface with a clamp 4 Connect the external antenna to the appropriate base station Note The length of the coaxial cable must not exc
34. 7 o ee 07 f fon on lor 597 624 501 532 If you need more DNs use DNs in the 565 to 596 range Ensure no other devices are assigned to these DNs before you use them Change the DN type field to ISDN and DECT The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available P0937235 02 1 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 113 FEM Switch Settings The DIP switches on the underside of the FEM module are used to turn the six ports on the front of the module on or off You need to turn a port on for each Norstar expansion module you want to connect to the BCM Each port also occupies one full DS30 channel Therefore if you have a full configured six module Norstar system to convert you need to turn on all six ports on the FEM and therefore no other module can be installed in the Business Communications Manager Note The FEM module only supports connections to the Norstar trunk and station expansion modules To turn on a fiber port set the DIP switch for the corresponding DS30 channel as shown in Table 23 For example if you want to use fiber port 2 turn on DIP switch 2 DS30 channel 3 After the module is installed an LED lights beside each active fiber port Table 23 shows the switch for
35. Communications Manager base unit can accommodate a maximum of three media bay modules The Business Communications Manager expansion unit can accommodate a maximum of six media bay modules Station media bay modules connect telephones and analog telecommunication devices to the Business Communications Manager system Table 6 provides a list of the station modules that can be used on the Business Communications Manager system Station modules DSM 16 DSM 32 Digital Station Media Bay Module telephones Digital Station Media Bay Module telephones to the Business Connects a maximum of 16 digital Connects a maximum of 32 digital Communications Manager system 4X16 Connects a maximum of four CLID lines Only available for North American Combination 4 line CTM and for a maximum of 16 digital telephones systems This module can be DSM16 4x16 Media Bay Module combined with CTMs on the same P T DS30 channel 4X16 Media Bay Module ASM8 Connects a maximum of eight analog Only available for North American Analog Station Media Bay devices to the Business Communications systems Module Manager system Digital Station Media Bay Module Three types of media bay modules support digital telephones on the Business Communications Manager Each module has a minimum of one amphenol connector on the faceplate This section describes the two DSM modules Refer to Figure 18 on page 61 e Digi
36. Danger Do not fasten power supply cords Do not fasten the Business Communications Manager base unit or Business Communications Manager expansion unit power supply cords to any building surface P0937235 02 1 Chapter 9 Starting the System 123 Checking System Power and Status After you connect power to the Business Communications Manager system the Power LED on the front of the base unit and expansion unit lights Refer to Figure 44 Once the system services have reactivated the Status LED turns solid green Figure 44 LEDs confirm that base unit is active power status These two LEDs are solid green Note During system initialization the system performs diagnostics on the hardware configuration size and installation If the power fails system data remains in memory Table 24 describes the possible operating states of the LEDs on the front of the Business Communications Manager base unit The Business Communications Manager expansion unit has both a power and a status LED which provide the same indicators as for the base unit Table 24 Business Communications Manager base unit LED states Indicates state of OK N A a minimum of 1 N A system power PS needs attention Indicates access to indicates heavy N A N A N A the system disk drive
37. Figure 110 Removing power supply bracket single power supply models 228 Figure 111 Remove the power supply screws 0 0 0 eee eee eee 229 Figure 112 Redundant power supply upgrade overview 20 ee eae 230 Figure 113 Removing power supply bracket 000 cee eee eee 231 Figure 114 Remove the power supply screws 002 020s 232 Figure 115 Remove the KNOG cancecadecsaeig dios heeededgatenneasdecs 232 Figure 116 Attach the redundant power supply housing 044 233 Figure 117 Securing the power supply bracket 0000 ceca eeaee 233 Figure 118 Insert and attach the modules 00 0c eee eee 234 Figure 119 Removing the power module 0 0c eee eee ees 235 Figure 120 Expansion unit standard power supply interior connections 236 Figure 121 Expansion unit redundant power supply interior connections 237 Figure 122 Installing the power module in a redundant expansion unit 237 Figure 123 LAN card replacement overview 000 239 Figure 124 Business Communications Manager base unit LAN cardLEDs 240 Installation and Maintenance Guide 26 Figures Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 BIWLCOVERIIEK phen eewdeeeeeeewd hohe dediet EER ee sd ee BREE 241 mstal ihe LAN Cad 261 sea Rada ceeds radarit LRhe Le SeAe TOO os 242 PEC replacement overview 0 0c
38. Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator Two more Java Class links appear Click on the Java Class link that applies to your browser A download wizard appears Follow the prompts on the wizard to download the Java Class files Optimizing Unified Manager Speed The following are a number of suggestions about how to ensure you have the optimal connection to your Unified Manager while you program or maintain your Business Communications System Use the LAN WAN or serial port to connect to your computer and use the Unified Manager to perform configuration If you run multiple operations on your computer we recommend that you use Windows NT or 2000 to ensure optimal performance with the Unified Manager If your computer is using Windows 95 98 the interaction can be slower if you attempt to run more than one application P0937235 02 1 71 Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System The media bay modules are the devices in the Business Communications Manager system that permit you to connect your extensions and the public switched telephone network PSTN lines to the call processing capabilities of the Business Communications Manager system A special media bay module called a Fiber expansion module FEM allows you to update from a Norstar system to a Business Communications Manager by reusing the Norstar expansion modules and the fiber cables to the modules When you order your Business Communications
39. Line set type Line Loop DN range Media bay module DIP switch setting Line set type Line Loop DN range P0937235 02 1 Media Bay Module Combinations 273 Set DNs and Port Numbers The media bay module based on the switch settings of the module defines which DNs and port numbers can be populated with telephones If you have changed the default start DN for your system use Table 65 to identify the DNs and ports for your sets If you are using the default start DN 211 a completed chart is provided in Table 34 on page 148 Table 65 Cross referencing ports and DNs 26 White Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 1 Blue White Port 201 Port 301 Port 401 Port 501 Port 601 Port 701 27 White Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 2 Orange White Port 202 Port 302 Port 402 Port 502 Port 602 Port 702 28 White Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 3 Green White Port 203 Port 303 Port 403 Port 503 Port 603 Port 703 29 White Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 4 Brown White Port 204 Port 304 Port 404 Port 504 Port 604 Port 704 30 White Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 5 Slate White Port 205 Port 305 Port 405 Port 505 Port 605 Port 705 31 Red Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 6 Blue Red Port 206 Port 306 Port 406 Port 506 Port 606 Port 706 32 Red Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 7 Orange Red_ Port 207 Port 307 Port 407 Port 507 P
40. Maintenance Guide 202 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Make a call If the problem continues the device or the external line is possibly at fault Plug the device into a different line a A W N If the problem continues the device is possibly at fault For more information about ATA 2 contact your customer service representative P0937235 02 1 203 Chapter 16 Preparing Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades When you need to replace or update a piece of hardware on the Business Communications System you must ensure the system is safely disconnected from the trunk lines and shut down To replace interior components on these units you can remove the top to access the inside of the units Also if you are replacing any of the PCI cards base unit only or any of the media bay modules you also need to remove the front bezel of the unit Figure 88 provides an overview of the process for preparing the Business Communications Manager hardware for maintenance or upgrade procedures Figure 88 Preparing for maintenance overview Use Unified Manager to shut down software Disconnect cables Remove the top Restore power from the front of from the unit to the units the server and expansion cabinet Perform Reconnect Remove ac power maintenance cables to the plugs from both upgrade front of the units units procedure Test system Remove fro
41. North America only 65 M7324N International only 65 maintenance maintain backups 209 removing the hard disk 210 replacing telephones 253 system restart 206 Maxell CR2032 coin cell battery 249 maximum loss ATA2 184 MCDN networking 45 Q SIG voice networking 45 media bay modules 4X16 description 39 4X16 settings 108 ASM DIP switch settings 109 ASM wiring 141 ASM8 overview availability by regions 259 BRI DIP switch settings 103 BRI overview 39 channel requirements 77 CTM description 39 CTM DIP switch settings 104 106 DECT 40 DECT settings 112 DIP switch settings 98 DS30 channel hierarchy 95 DSM DIP switch settings 111 DSM wiring 141 DSM 16 overview 40 DSM32 overview 40 DTM description 39 DTM DIP switch settings 101 FEM overview 40 FEM settings 113 FEM wiring 144 grounding strap 116 install overview 50 installation overview 50 installation process map 115 installing a new module 117 LED troubleshooting 120 limitation 115 offset configurations 99 removing power from the system 116 replacement process map 119 replacing 119 selecting the modules 71 special modules 112 Installation and Maintenance Guide 300 Index station module wiring 141 switch offsets 76 moving telephones 154 MSC system capacity 74 troubleshooting 120 wiring 137 media bays number on base unit 36 Media Services Card see MSC memory amount of 36 expansion capabilities 246 replacing 244 247 memory button CAP 148 auxi
42. Standard Power Supply 0000 0c eee eee eee 228 Installing a Standard Power Suppl caciagededesvdediaceciueccaaxanads 229 Upgrading to a Redundant Power Supply 0000 0c cece eee eee ee 230 Removing and the Standard Power Supply 00000 eee eae eaee 231 Installing the Redundant Power Supply 200200e cece eee eens 233 Replacing a Redundant Power Supply Module 0 00 0c ee aeeae 235 Replacing a Power Supply in an Expansion Unit 0000 0c eee 236 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware 239 Replacing Data Carde oi60 cs cde dear a tipai a a es 239 Removing A DIACEN erigat paio a Re ie E e i a 240 iIngtalling the Car cxdck ucwdecaeday direu ir i kee Ree eee eae e A 242 Installation and Maintenance Guide 22 Contents Meplecing PECs ocic1c diners dded eed dhe deed AGRE KREWE RES Eee dees oA 243 Pen FEOS 2 58ny Cate HON KE ORG Deh aN NRA POR Leda etau ed 244 eta a PE ccd ccc uecaueedeasotieadtaanedeadeimeassedeaenwarsd 245 Replacing MeMGry 22c cncce ever acer etree d ee eeeet de dereeanene amma nad 246 Replacing Memory DIMM Chips 00 000 e cee eee eee 247 Replacing the Clock Calendar Battery 0 0 0 c cece eects 249 Removing the Clock Calendar Battery 0 000 cece eee eee 250 instaling the New Battery swe ikke bees tales doe hele 251 Chapter 21 Replacing Telephones ciscsiseccdecs deve cwneseewsa
43. Warning Failure to follow procedures to properly disconnect the Business A Communications Manager base unit and expansion unit can result in module or system damage Warning Ensure you are properly grounded before handling modules or any components that are part of the Business Communications Manager hardware This section describes the recommended procedure for shutting down the Business Communications Manager prior to installing new modules 1 Ifyou are adding or replacing a module in an active system follow these steps first Choose System Click the Logoff menu and then click Shutdown Click the Yes button Wait until the Status changes to Complete It is safe to turn off the system Click the Done button 0 a o o Exit the Unified Manager 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 3 Ensure the cables connected to the front of the base unit and the expansion unit are clearly marked 4 Remove the cables from all the media bay modules and the MSC on the Business Communications Manager base unit front panel and the expansion unit if there is one 5 Disconnect the base unit and expansion unit power cords from the ac outlet P0937235 02 1 Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules 117 Installing a Media Bay Module After the system is powered down you can install and remove media bay modules as required Follow these procedures to install a
44. a DECT media bay module The cordless handset can be twinned with a stationary set or configured to act as an independent set This system has three hardware components which are described in DECT System Components on page 67 Audio Conference Unit TO ACU provides large room r audio conferencing The i keypad provides many of the Fi m gt set features of the basic Norstar M E M series telephones without E7 a display or memory buttons This set comes with three microphones Companion System Components Station auxiliary power supply SAPS provides power for the Business Communications Manager central answering position CAP module Can also be used to extend the loop length between a telephone or terminal and the Business Communications Manager system from 1 000 to 2 600 feet You must use a dedicated cable to connect the two locations Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 converts digital signals to analog signals to allow communication with analog devices such as FAX machines modems and answering machines The ATA 2 supports a maximum transmission rate of 28 8 kbit s With a single line telephone the ATA 2 supports a long loop configuration For more information refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 183 The Companion system allows portable access from a fixed line The system consists of the following hardware components e Companion base station transmits an
45. a telephone to another telephone in the system To have calls forwarded outside the system use Line Redirection Call Forward No Answer A feature that forwards all calls arriving at a telephone to another selected telephone in the system The system transfers the calls after a specific number of rings Assign Call Forward No Answer under Capabilities in System DNs programming Call Forward On Busy A feature that forwards all calls at a telephone to another selected telephone if the original telephone is busy Assign this feature under Capabilities in System DNs programming Call Forward Override An automatic system feature that allows the user to call another user and ask that user to stop forwarding calls to their set P0937235 02 1 Glossary 277 call log An incoming call log accessed through the set that displays the following information for every call e sequence number within the Call Log e name and number of caller e long distance indication e call answered indication e time and date of the call e number of repeated calls from the same source e name of the line that received the call Camp on A feature that allows the user to reroute a call to a telephone when all the lines on that telephone are busy To answer a camped call use Call Queuing or select a line if the camped call appears on the set Queued calls get priority over camped calls camp timeout The length of a delay before a camped call ret
46. and Attendant Console User Guide Call Center Agent User Guide and Call Center Supervisor User Guide Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide Call Detail Recording System Admin Guide CallPilot Desktop Messaging Software Install and Maintenance Guide CallPilot Fax Set up amp Operation Guide and CallPilot Fax User Guide CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide and CallPilot Programming Record CallPilot Message Networking Setup and Operation Guide and CallPilot Message Networking User Guide CallPilot Reference Guide IP Telephony Configuration Guide LAN CTE Configuration Guide Multimedia Call Center Setup and Operation Guide and Multimedia Call Center Web Developers Guide Personal Call Manager User Guide P0937235 02 1 Preface 33 How to Get Help Your local distributor should provide the technical support for your Business Communications Manager system or have access to that information through a Technical Service Center TSC If you require non technical support contact 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 choose option 3 Sales or Pre Sales Support Installation and Maintenance Guide 34 Preface P0937235 02 1 35 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager This chapter describes the Business Communications Manager system and the hardware required to create the system The Busine
47. are working when both the Power and Status LEDs on the modules are on with no blinking e If the Power LED does not light refer to Shutting Down the System on page 116 After the Business Communications Manager is correctly shut down remove the module and check the connectors at the back of the module for dirt or loose connections After you reinstall the module if the LED still does not light install a different module into that bay to check for a possible fault in the backplate If the second module works assume that the first module is defective and replace it with a new module e If the Power LED lights but the Status light does not light or continues to blink wait 10 minutes to allow for information download If the light continues to blink power down the system and check the DIP switch settings on the module e Ifthe LEDs are on solid but the module cannot communicate or be communicated with check the Unified Manager settings for the module For information about the LEDs on the Business Communications Manager base unit and expansion unit refer to See Table 24 on page 123 P0937235 02 1 121 Chapter 9 Starting the System The Business Communications Manager base unit and expansion unit are each powered through an ac outlet The voltage required depends on the geographical location of the units All systems are initially set at the factory based on the intended destination You must check that the volt
48. assignment 190 FAX compatibility 190 insertion loss measurement 185 install data communication device 191 installing 147 maximum loss 184 modem compatibility 190 mounting on wall 187 overview power source 187 test 189 Tones On OFF 189 transmission rates 190 troubleshooting 201 Attendant Console 45 audio input jack 194 autodial 65 automatic telephone relocation 154 auxiliary jack 58 139 auxiliary ringer installation 193 programming 193 backboard 86 background music volume 196 backup power RPI 157 backups maintenance warning 209 base removing cables 116 base station clearances 168 Companion 66 connecting plug top power supply 169 DECT 67 description 63 distances 167 hand off 167 indoor antenna 176 installation 167 maximum cable 161 minimum distances 167 omnidirectional outdoor antenna 178 positioning 156 167 powering up 170 proprietary extension cable 171 RG 58 U coaxial cable 175 RG 58A U antenna cable 171 RPI TCM connections 169 termination board 168 turn off power 171 U S installation 171 updating software 170 wiring length power 161 wiring RPI 161 base unit cable 80 check voltage 122 connect expansion unit 92 DS256 port 92 fan LED 218 installation overview 50 installing clock battery 251 installing media bay modules 115 installing on a wall 84 knockout plate 232 memory power LED 230 power supply 227 power supply switch 122 proximity to expansion unit 89 remove LAN card 240 r
49. becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events on network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord However if the ac power is unplugged prior to disconnecting the cables from the front of the base unit this hazard can occur System shutdown You must disconnect the media bay module cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from an earthed System startup You must reconnect the power cords to an earthed outlet before reconnecting the cables to the media bay modules Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and ac mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place at the completion of any servicing Figure 50 on page 138 provides an overview of the process for connecting trunk and station wiring to the Business Communications Manager media bay modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 138 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules Figure 50 Trunk and station wiring overview Trunk and station modules Media bay modules installed Read warnings Wire cables to telco demarcation block Connect cables to ap
50. cables from the front of the server and on new module to match old module Monitor LEDs for power and status expansion cabinet Install new module Check the module Remove power in media bay aul in the Unified from both units anager Replace coverplate Remove front bezel from base unit or expansion unit Restore power to base unit and expansion unit Remove failed module Reconnect all cables If a media bay module fails follow this procedure to properly replace the module 1 Follow the steps in Shutting Down the System on page 116 to ensure the system shuts down correctly Remove the front bezel from the unit where the module resides Pull the latch beside the module to be replaced to release the module Refer to Figure 42 on page 117 Slide the module out of the bay where it is installed Record the switch settings from the old module Installation and Maintenance Guide 120 Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules Set the DIP switches on the new module to match the settings you recorded in step 3 Refer to Installing a Media Bay Module on page 117 to install the module into the media bay 8 Refer to Reconnecting the Equipment on page 118 to restore the system to operation Installation Replacement Troubleshooting The Business Communications Manager media bay modules
51. connector Position the DIMM so that one of the notches is on the side of the slot nearest to the Business Communications Manager cards 7 Carefully push the DIMM down until the fastening tabs clip to the side of the DIMM Note Do not force the DIMM into its slot If the DIMM does not slide in easily check the alignment of the DIMM 8 Replace the cover 9 Restore the unit to operation Refer to Restarting the System on page 206 for details P0937235 02 1 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware 249 Replacing the Clock Calendar Battery The clock calendar battery supplies the power required to keep the BIOS information current if there is a power failure Figure 127 provides an overview of the process of replacing this component Warning You must replace the battery with a CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery Do AN not use any other manufacturer because this may invalidate the safety approval of the Business Communications Manager base unit and possibly cause a fire or explosion Figure 131 Battery replacement overview Do a software shutdown Set up unit for Install maintenance new battery WARNING faces up CAREFULLY lift battery off motherboard Restore unit to operation Danger Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully
52. each fiber port Table 23 FEM switch settings Set this switch to turn on the port This DS30 channel gets assigned Choose a port to turn on If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available Note If you turn on all six switches you are using all the DS30 channels In this case the Business Communications Manager can support only the FEM module All other media bays must be empty Warning Do not attempt to turn on ports requiring a DS30 channel that is already in AN service to another media bay module located on the same Business Communications Manager Doing this results in unpredictable behavior with both modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 114 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings P0937235 02 1 115 Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules After you set the switches on the media bay modules you can install them in the Business Communications Manager base unit or the Business Communications Manager expansion unit The Business Communications Manager base unit accommodates a maximum of three media bay modules If your system requires more than three media bay modules you need to connect a Business Communications Manager expansion unit to the base unit Figure 40 provides an overview of the process for installing media bay modules Note The number of media bay modules you c
53. first one 10 Slate Red X10 10 26 36 Black Blue X11 11 27 11 Blue Black X11 11 27 37 Black Orange X12 12 28 12 Orange Black X12 12 28 38 Black Green X13 13 29 13 Green Black X13 13 29 39 Black Brown X14 14 30 14 Brown Black X14 14 30 40 Black Slate X15 15 31 15 Slate Black X15 15 31 41 Yellow Blue X16 16 32 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules 143 Table 31 DSM wiring chart Continued Sets Sets Pin Wire color Port 1st 2nd 16 Blue Yellow X16 16 32 42 40 noconnections 17 25 Table 32 and Figure 55 provide the wiring scheme for the eight pairs that connect to the ASM Table 32 ASM wiring chart Pin Wire color Port Set Figure 55 Wiring for an ASM 8 26 White Blue x01 1 1 Blue White X01 1 27 White Orange X02 2 2 Orange White X02 2 a 28 White Green X03 3 connector 3 Green White X03 3 29 White Brown X04 4 4 Brown White X04 4 30 White Slate X05 5 5 Slate White X05 5 31 Red Blue X06 6 6 Blue Red X06 6 32 Red Orange X07 7 7 Orange Red X07 7 33 Red Green X08 8 8 Green Red X08 8 34 50 no connection 9 25 Note Refer to Line and Extension Numbers for Specific Modules on page 101 to see the relationship between the DS30 channel number and the DNs Configuration information is included in the chapters on setting up modules and DNs in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide 2 Insta
54. has a switch capacity of 50 mA non inductive at 40 V maximum You must remove any inductive load on the output e The page relay contacts connect to the tip and ring terminals of the jack The sleeve terminal of the jack connects to ground You must use a stereo plug to connect the page relay Connecting the Paging System Install the external paging system using the installation instructions that came with the paging system 1 Connect the paging system audio input to the Page output on the MSC Refer to Figure 81 Figure 81 Audio input jack Audio input jack MSC faceplate Ring Tip E Sleeve O Tip Page signal O O Page output Ring Page signal O Sleeve Ground P0937235 02 1 Chapter 14 Installing Optional Telephony Equipment 195 2 Connect the paging system relay to the Page relay output on the MSC Refer to Figure 82 Figure 82 Page relay jack Page relay jack Tip Ring Ring Sleeve Page relay output Page relay output Sleeve Ground Tip MSC faceplate Page relay o000L AN Warning The paging connections must not be connected to exposed plant Tip Paging tips Business Communications Manager external paging does not support talk back paging equipment unless you use an external line port The Business Communications Manager system provides paging over the telephone speakers when there is no external paging equipment External Mus
55. in choosing a compatible time zone If your exact location is not on the list choose the one with the time zone closest to you Note that some time zones are individualized because they do not switch from Standard Time to Daylight Saving Time For example this is the case for Saskatchewan The format of the time and date changes are based on the prime language of the region Table 60 provides a list of formats based on language or country Table 60 Time date formats based on language Language Country Time Date format Danish 2001 01 01 13 57 Dutch 1 Jan 01 13 57 EuroFrench 1 jan 13 57 EuroSpanish 1 Ene 13 57 German 1 Jan 13 57 Italian 1 Gen 13 57 NA English Jan1 1 57 pm NA French 2001 01 01 13 57 NA Spanish Ene 1 1 57 pm Norwegian 1 Jan 13 57 Swedish 2001 01 01 13 57 Turkish 1 Ock 13 57 UK English 1 Jan 1 57 pm System Defaults Table 61 compares the system defaults for the North American Global and UK regions In addition the following functionality applies e Regions for Denmark Holland and Sweden are the same as the Global region except for the default to local languages and local tones and cadences e The Region for the Caribbean is the same as the North American region except that it supports the M7000 telephone e The Region for CALA is the same as the Caribbean region except NI ISDN is replaced by ETSI ISDN u law e The Region for Europe is the same as the Unit
56. information about using Unified Manager refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide 1 2 Open the Unified Manager Assign the following line features to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 e assign one external line to the telephone e set ringing for this line ON or OFF as required e assign one intercom line e assign Held Line Reminder to ON e disable Full Handsfree e disable Handsfree Answerback e disable Paging Reception Assign an external line an intercom line or a line pool as the Prime Line for the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Note Direct access to a CO line for modems fax machines and credit card gt verification machines is possible using the Hotline feature For direct access to a CO line program an external line as the Hotline Enter a pause to replace the telephone number for the Hotline F78 4 5 Exit the Unified Manager Set the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Tones ON when you are assigning an analog voice device Set the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Tones OFF when you are assigning a data communication device For details refer to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 User Guide The default is Tones OFF Testing the ATA 2 Confirm that the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 is operating by connecting a single line telephone to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Make an internal call and an extern
57. installation of the various pieces of hardware The base station has the option of using internal or external antennas For most installations the internal antenna will be used If you need to install external antennas refer to Installing External Antennas and Lightning Surge Protection on page 171 Installing a RPI for the Base Stations The remote power interconnect unit RPI provides remote power for base station support Figure 57 shows a diagram of the RPI Caution The RPI unit must have the DC backup power supplied by a UL listed universal power supply UPS The UPS must have an output voltage rating of 44 to 52 V DC with a maximum fault current limit of 6 A to protect the RPI output wiring If these requirements are not met it is necessary to use class 1 wiring Warning You must install the RPI units inside a building A The AC outlet powering the RPI must be installed near the equipment and must be easily accessible The length of the RPI cord from the outside surface of the unit to the plug must be a minimum of 1 3 m 4 5 ft and a maximum of 4 6 m 15 ft Figure 57 RPI unit Installation and Maintenance Guide 158 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems There are two versions of the RPI unit e The RPI 8 BIX UL supports a maximum of eight base stations e The RPI 16 BIX UL supports a maximum of 16 base stations Each RPI has a connection printed circuit board an
58. make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC requirements EN 55022 Class A and EN 55024 These EMC limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial and light industrial environment WARNING This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The above warning is inserted for regulatory reasons If any customer believes that they have an interference problem either because their Nortel Networks product seems to cause interference or suffers from interference they should contact their distributor immediately The distributor will assist with a remedy for any problems and if necessary will have full support from Nortel Networks Safety WARNING Only qualified service personnel may install this equipment The instructions in this manual are intended for use by qualified service personnel only Risk of shock Ensure the Business Communications Manager is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the Business Communications Manager Read and follow installation instructions carefully Installation and Maintenance Gu
59. more than one module to be assigned the same DS30 channel number but with a different offset number Modules that can have offsets assigned include CTM CTM8 BRIM S T and ASM 8 For example two CTM 8s can be assigned to the same DS30 channel number with different offset numbers However you cannot assign a CTM8 and an BRIM S T module to the same DS30 channel Offsets are assigned using DIP switches 1 2 and 3 on the media bay module Note Media bay modules that do not or cannot share DS30 channels always assign the offset as 0 zero As well if the module requires more than one DS30 channel such as the 4x16 module only the first DS30 channel is set on the DIP switches The next consecutive DS30 channel number is automatically assigned by the module Figure 26 shows how a DS30 channel containing 16 line connections is broken down into four offset groups of four lines each Figure 26 Offsets are part of DS30 channel line groups Offsets Offset 0 have Offset 1 1 DS30 channel i 16 li e Offset 2 16 lines eac Offset 3 e _ P0937235 02 1 Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System 77 Determining Module Channel Requirements Figure 27 shows how much of a DS30 channel each module requires Figure 27 Space requirements for media bay modules Trunks lines Stations extensions Combination and specialized media bay modules 1 DS30 Channel 1 DS30 Chann
60. of 1 PS no power to the of system problem with fan needs attention module power power or heat inside housing P0937235 02 1 Chapter 9 Starting the System 125 3 You are now ready to connect the system to the network and initialize it Note You can monitor the state of the base unit LEDs from your computer Refer to Using the System Status Monitor to Monitor LEDs on page 198 Connecting the Data Networking Hardware This section describes how to connect network cards to the Business Communications Manager system Warning Check with your network administrator before you connect the Business A Communications Manager base unit to the network to ensure there are no IP address conflicts The default address for the Business Communications Manager system e TIP 10 10 10 1 e Subnet 255 255 255 0 Warning If the default IP address would create a network conflict you must change the IP address of the Business Communications Manager base unit before you connect any network connections To change the IP address outside of a network you can use one of the following e aterminal and a null modem cable e acomputer and an ethernet crossover cable Refer to Using a Null Modem Serial Cable on page 131 or Using an Ethernet Crossover Cable on page 134 for detailed instructions about connecting to the base unit Installation and Maintenance Guide 126 Chapter 9 Starting the System Connecting
61. or private network connection between the Business Communications Manager system and the outside world Trunk media bay module Physical units installed in a Business Communications Manager that connect the system to the outside world User Speed Dial Two digit codes 71 94 programmed to dial external telephone numbers These numbers are available only at the telephone on which they are programmed v 90 A data transmission standard used by the modem installed in the Business Communications Manager This standard allows data to be transmitted to the modem at 56 kbit s and transmitted from the modem at 33 kbit s Voice Message Center If you have subscribed to Call Display services you can receive visual Voice Message Waiting Indication on a display telephone If you have Voice Message Waiting Indication you can program the telephone numbers required to access a maximum of five external voice message centers You can program which of the five centers is to be accessed by each specific line Voice over IP VoIP The capability to deliver voice using the Internet Protocol In general this means sending voice information in digital form in discrete packets rather than in the traditional circuit committed protocols of the public switched telephone network PSTN P0937235 02 1 Glossary 289 Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ WFQ is a queuing method that allows low volume traffic such as Telnet to be given priority Interactive traffic
62. over E1 lines offering significant enhancements to Business Communications Manager 2 5 networking capabilities DPNSS makes it easier to support centralized network functionality within private networks for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls Its routing capabilities provide more of the larger network capabilities without the expense of installing a new system re configuring all the nodes and worrying about a lot of downtime Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent once the DPNSS is programmed into the system DPNSS allows a local node acting as a terminating node to communicate with other PBXs over the network using E1 lines For example corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS lines to other Business Communications Manager 2 5 systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected This allows connected Business Communications Manager 2 5 systems to function like a private network Analog trunk types Public Provides potential access for any set on the system Private Provides potential access for a specific set Installation and Maintenance Guide System Region Attributes Defining Time Zones by Country and Language Time zones are based on the actual time zone where the Business Communications Manager base unit is located The Time Zone dropdown list on the initialization screen allows you to be very specific
63. programming B channel bearer channel An ISDN standard transmission channel used for voice or data transmission Also known as a media channel Installation and Maintenance Guide 276 Glossary background music A feature that plays music from the speaker of your telephone Background Music is available when you attach a music source to the system and enable the feature under Feature settings in System programming base station This is the radio telephony unit that allows communication between wireless handsets such as Companion or DECT to the Business Communications Manager system basic rate interface BRI An ISDN interface that uses two B channels and a D channel 2B D ETSI BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN service baud rate A unit of measurement of data transmission speed Baud rate is approximately equivalent to Bits Per Second BPS Typical baud rates are 300 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 BIOS basic input output system A program contained in Read Only Memory ROM that acts as the interface between software programs and the computer hardware bit A bit is the smallest unit of information identified by the computer A bit has one of two values 0 or 1 to indicate off or on Bus A collection of communication lines that carry electronic signals between components in the system Call Forward A feature that forwards all the calls arriving at
64. select a line manually Note If you replace a digital telephone with an IP telephone or vice versa programming is lost because the connection method is different and the DNs are assigned differently Refer to the IP Telephony Configuration Guide for directions for installing and moving an IP telephone Status of the Replaced Telephone The replaced telephone loses its programming and internal number If the telephone is plugged in again at another jack the Business Communications Manager considers the replaced telephone a new telephone P0937235 02 1 255 Appendix A System Region Attributes This appendix provides a number of tables that show the relationship of system programming to the region or software that you select at system startup Each region is designed using a set of system defaults that provide specific functionality for the region in which the system is deployed This can include specific languages and a specific order in which the languages are set as default language 1 whether Companion or DECT mobility will be allowed and what type of trunks can be used Core Software and Regions Each Region setting requires a specific core software to perform correctly Table 49 shows the core software available Table 49 Core software defined by region and carrier profile Core Software Carrier s w ID T1 CT2 Plus T1 Etiquette E1 Euro E1 Global E1 CALA Region Caribbean Cari
65. server on the network DNS Domain Name System Business Communications Manager 2 5 functions as both a gateway to the internet and as a DNS proxy for your network The DNS service allows clients to enter a domain name such as www nortelnetworks com instead of an IP address when using web browsers IP Routing Business Communications Manager 2 5 supports the following IP routing protocols static routing RIP Routing Information Protocol OSPF Open Shortest Path First IPX Routing Business Communications Manager 2 5 supports the following IPX Routing protocols in a NetWare environment static routing RIP Routing Information Protocol SAP Service Advertising Protocol NAT Network Address Translation Business Communications Manager 2 5 supports both static and dynamic NAT for a number of packet types and protocols NAT is a network security feature that translates the IP addresses used within your private network to different IP addresses known to internet users outside your private network Policy Management Business Communications Manager 2 5 allows you to implement classes of service and assign priority levels to different types of traffic using the DiffServ network architecture You can configure policies that monitor the characteristics of traffic for example its source destination and protocol and perform a controlling action on the traffic when certain user defined characteristic
66. start 00 00 start 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 Service 6 start 00 00 start 00 00 start 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 Call Forward Delay Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 2 ring cycles Options e 2ring cycles e 2ring cycles e 2ring cycles e 3ring cycles e 4ring cycles e 6ring cycles e 10 ring cycles 3ring cycles 4ring cycles 6ring cycles e 10 ring cycles e 3ring cycles 4ring cycles 6ring cycles e 10 ring cycles Installation and Maintenance Guide 266 System Region Attributes Table 61 Region defaults Continued ISDN overlap receiving Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom DRT Delay Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Options e 1ring cycles e 1 ring cycles e 1 ring cycles e 2ring cycles e 2ring cycles e 2ring cycles e 3ring cycles e 3ring cycles e 3ring cycles e 4ring cycles 4ring cycles 4ring cycles e 6ring cycles 6ring cycles 6ring cycles e 10ringcycles 10ring cycles Handsfree none none none Pickup Group none none none Remind Delay 60 secs 60 secs 60 secs Allow SLR disabled disabled disabled Transfer Callback Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Options e 3ring cycles e 3ring cycles e 3ring cy
67. system is initialized any module set to DS30 channel 7 or requiring the use of channel 7 becomes inoperable If you change the channel split from a 3 5 split to a 2 6 split after the system is initialized all data is lost and all optional applications must be reinstalled and reconfigured Refer to Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System on page 71 for details about determining how many media bay modules can be installed in a system As well this chapter describes the various types of telephone equipment that can be used with the Business Communications Manager system Figure 11 provides pointers to the sections that describe the modules and telephones that can be installed into the Business Communications Manager base unit Figure 11 Telephony hardware components Trunk Media Bay Modules daw Se eI on page 56 000g ol Station Media Bay Modules moa gt oE o Specialized Media Bay i Modules on page 63 on page 60 eo0000000000 Refer to Media Bay Module Availability by Region on page 259 and Trunk Availability by Region on page 260 to determine which media bay modules and which types of trunk lines are available in your loca tion on page 65 Installation and Maintenance Guide 54 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware
68. the user set parameters Sanity Time 60 255 The time in seconds between sanity checks Default 240 Timeouts 0 254 The number of sanity checks that must fail before the system Default 10 status monitor sends a reset signal to the computing platform Emergency Telephone Does Not Function If the emergency telephone is connected to the system use the following procedure Check the power LED on the ASM 8 to check that the ASM 8 is receiving power Check that the emergency telephone has dial tone Check the external line and emergency telephone connections A O N a To avoid damage to the emergency telephone connect the telephone directly to the external line and check for dial tone 5 Replace the MSC If the emergency telephone is connected to the CTM use the following procedure 1 Check that the system has a CTM installed 2 Check that there is no dial tone at the emergency telephone 3 Replace the CTM P0937235 02 1 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting 201 ATA 2 Does Not Function If the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 does not function Follow these steps to troubleshoot the problem oa A WO N Make sure there is ac power connected to the ATA 2 unit Make sure that ATA 2 is in the Tones OFF mode For Data Applications only Correctly configure the ATA 2 telephone port for data communication Allow sufficient start up time Assign the prime line Assign a ringing line if requ
69. the Cards The data networking hardware is installed in the Business Communications Manager base unit at the factory All systems that use remote data management have one LAN card Some systems have a LAN and a WAN card Some systems can have two LAN cards Some systems also have a modem card Figure 46 shows one of four profiles available Figure 46 Locating the data cards on the base unit oo 0000 20 WAN card PER card LAN card Note This illustration shows a profile 1 data card setup Your system may not have all the cards indicated Warning Do not plug these cables into the system unless it is running A For maintenance shutdowns ALWAYS follow this process a Shut down the software through the Unified Manager if possible b Remove all cable connects from the front of the base unit and expansion unit c Remove power from the base unit and the expansion unit d DO NOT RECONNECT the cables to the front of the units until the power connection has been restored Connecting Wiring to the LAN Card Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable LAN card face To connect the LAN card insert the local area network LAN cable into the RJ45 jack on the LAN card For information about the location of the LAN card refer to F
70. the DS256 which is located on the media services card MSC The diagram also shows how offsets which are discussed in the next section are a subgroup of the DS30 channels Warning If you change the channel split after your system is configured from 3 5 to 2 6 A you will lose all the data and optional application connections Figure 25 DS30 channel model Four offsets per channel each with four lines DS30 channel 2 I DS30 channel 3 l DS30 channels DS30 channels available to modules DS30 channel 4 available to modules in a 2 6 split in a 3 5 split DS30 channel 5 DS30 channel 6 DS30 channel 7 DS30 channel numbers are set using the 4 5 and 6 DIP switches on the back or underside of the media bay modules The exception is the FEM module The FEM DIP switches turn on ports each of which consumes one DS30 channel Installation and Maintenance Guide 76 Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System Setting Offsets Each offset is one quarter of a DS30 channel Each DS30 channel supports 16 lines 32 timeslots for most modules Exceptions e DTM modules support 23 to 30 lines per channel e FEM modules where each DS30 channel supports one Norstar fiber module connection Offsets are numbered 0 1 2 and 3 Modules that require less than a full DS30 channel can be assigned a DS30 channel number and an offset number This allows
71. the LAN card in the Business Communications Manager base unit With this connection you can run Business Communications Manager Unified Manager to configure the Business Communications Manager system when you are unable to immediately connect your system to the live LAN card or your system does not have a network connection You use this type of connection in these situations e the computer you are using does not have access to the Business Communications Manager system through the network e the Business Communications Manager is not connected to a LAN or WAN e you have to change the IP address and netmask for the Business Communications Manager system before you connect it to the network Setting the Crossover Connections To connect to the Business Communications Manager using an Ethernet crossover cable you need a computer equipped with a 10 100 Base T network interface card and TCP IP protocol Figure 49 shows the connections required Figure 49 Ethernet crossover cable 3TD 3TD 6TD 6TD 1RD 1RD 2RD 2RD P0937235 02 1 Chapter 9 Starting the System 135 Configuring Your Computer You must configure your computer before you use it to connect to the Business Communications Manager system Note Your interface can differ depending on what version of system software you are using The task in this section is to specify IP and subnet addresses for the computer Click Start Settings Control Pan
72. the cable to the mounting plate 7 Insert the plastic plug into the base of the cover to keep moisture out 8 Feed the coaxial cable through the wall to the surge protector on the interior wall Installation and Maintenance Guide 180 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Installing a Lightning Surge Protector Canada Install the lightning surge protector for the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna to protect it from electrical surges The recommended lightning surge protector is part number A0382082 Refer to the installation instructions from the manufacturer for more details on its installation To install a lightning surge protector follow these steps 1 Install the surge protector on the interior wall as close as possible to the entry point of the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna Figure 72 shows where to locate the surge protector Follow the installation instructions provided with the surge protector Figure 72 Install the lightning surge protector Canada Exterior wall Interior wall p Copper plates saan O Surge protector Co axial cable to base station Cable clamps Co axial cable to anaa external Sca winpdmne ESDS ground lead 2 Attach the ground lead to an approved ground before you connect the ground lead to the surge protector The recommended wire gauge is 6 AWG 4 mm Connect the ground lead to the building ground Do not connect to a gro
73. the wire connections for a DB15 X 21 adapter cable Table 29 DB15 X 21 adapter cable Chassis Ground k ol rs 3 Receive Data A Receive Clock A 6 N 5 Clear to Send A 5 Request To Send B 10 z o 7 Signal Ground N N N o ao 9 Receive Clock B 13 11 External Clock B 14 13 Clear To Send B 12 Installation and Maintenance Guide 130 Chapter 9 Starting the System Installing the Cards Refer to Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware on page 239 for the removal and installation process for these cards Initializing the System After starting the Business Communications Manager system you are ready to set the initial configuration parameters The initial configuration defines your Business Communications Manager to the network It also gives the system a unique identity and initial parameters From that point you can continue with the specific configurations for your system which are described in Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide and the other user guides for each optional application you choose to add to your system Required Data Parameters Obtain the following parameter values from an Internet Service Provider ISP or corporate network administrator initial IP address and netmask for each network interface primary and optional secondary DNS servers default next hop router fractional T1 cha
74. to four analog CLID PSTN lines e CTM 8 North American systems only This CLID Trunk media bay module CTM connects to eight analog CLID PSTN lines e 4X16 North American systems only This module combines a four line CLID Trunk media bay module CTM with a 16 line Digital Station media bay module e DTM The Digital Trunk media bay module DTM connects to standard digital PSTN T1 E1 or PRI lines e BRI The Basic Rate Interface media bay module BRI connects to four BRI S T ISDN lines NT1 required S interface for Euro profiles T interface for North American based profiles e ASM 8 North American systems only The Analog Station media bay module ASM 8 connects to eight analog telephones or other analog equipment such as fax machines Installation and Maintenance Guide 40 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager DSM 16 The 16 port Digital Station media bay module DSM 16 connects to a maximum of 16 digital telephones DSM 32 The 32 port Digital Station media bay module DSM 32 connects to a maximum of 32 digital telephones DECT This module allows radio based cordless handsets to access systems that are configured to accept the Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT profile The module connects to radio base stations which receive and transmit signals to the handsets Refer to Mobility Services by Region on page 259 to determine the profiles that can
75. types of columns Do not install a base station with the antenna housings near metal objects Be careful not to damage existing wiring or panels Do not position base stations in ducts plenums or hollow spaces used to transport environmental air except where the duct plenum or hollow space is created by a suspended ceiling having lay in panels When you need more than one base station in a cell to meet traffic requirements position the base stations at the same cell center To place all base stations in the same cell center e forthe USA a minimum of 54 in and a maximum of 9 ft 9 in distance between the center of one base station to the center of another e for Canada a minimum of 9 cm and a maximum of 1 5 m distance from edge to edge Warning Never install base stations in rows Position base stations away from office areas or areas with high portable telephone traffic Table 42 on page 168 shows the minimum distance between office areas and base stations Install the base station on the ceiling or high on walls to maintain these minimum distances Installation and Maintenance Guide 168 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Table 42 Minimum distance between office areas and base stations mon s O femm Attaching a Companion Base Station Install base stations on a wall or on a ceiling When installing base stations on a wall install them with their covers at the bottom as shown in Figure 65 on
76. use the DECT protocol FEM The Fiber Expansion Media Bay Module FEM provides an easy upgrade from a fully loaded Norstar system to a Business Communications Manager system by connecting the six Norstar expansion modules to the Business Communications Manager system Business Communications Manager expansion unit a separate cabinet with six additional bays for media bay modules It connects to the server through an DS256 RJ45 connector A Business Communications Manager five meter DS256 cable is included with the expansion cabinet hardware Telephones and adapters Business telephones and adapters connect to the media bay modules installed in the Business Communications Manager system Business Communications Manager supports Norstar and Business Series Terminal sets as well as IP based Nortel sets Refer to Telephones and Adapters on page 65 for a description of the telephones that can be used with the system The Nortel Networks i2004 IP telephone and Nortel Networks i2050 Software Phone have separate installation and operations documentation Refer to the main index on your system CD Data Networking Components The data networking components connect the Business Communications Manager system to your local area network LAN and or the wide area network WAN These components are installed at the factory However additional cards can be added to an existing system Modem card North American systems only a V 90 m
77. 0 that you program to dial a telephone number a maximum of 24 digits long You can program System speed dial codes for the complete system under the System Speed heading T1 Digital carrier system or line that carries data at 1 544 Mb s Target lines Lines used only to answer incoming calls A target line routes a call according to digits it receives from an incoming trunk You refer to target lines in the same way as physical lines Telephony Application Program Interface TAPI A standard program interface that allows communication over telephones or video phones to people or phone connected resources elsewhere in the world Installation and Maintenance Guide 288 Glossary Transfer A feature that allows you to redirect a call to another telephone in your Business Communications Manager system over a network or outside your system Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP A language controlling communication between computers on the Internet TCP e checks packets of information for errors e sends requests for re transmission in the event of errors e returns multiple packets of a message into the original sequence when the message reaches its destination IP e controls how packets are sent out over networks e has a packet addressing method that allows any computer on the Internet forward a packet to another computer that is a step or more nearer to the recipient Trunk The public telephone system
78. 000 ft System Equipment and Supplies Use the following checklists to ensure that you have all the required equipment Basic Hardware The Business Communications Manager system consists of some combination of the following hardware Business Communications Manager base unit Business Communications Manager expansion unit media bay modules telephones cabling for connections between hardware units You can place a maximum of three media bay modules in the Business Communications Manager base unit You must install an Business Communications Manager expansion unit if you require more than three media bay modules Optional Equipment The following equipment can be added to the system to support specific requirements beyond the base unit Station auxiliary power supply SAPS Central answering position CAP or CAPN module to as many as five M7324 telephones in the system Business Communications Manager server Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 if connecting analog equipment to a digital media bay station module Uninterruptable power supply UPS as a standalone device Analog emergency telephone Installation and Maintenance Guide 82 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit Companion Equipment If you are installing a Companion system check that you have the following hardware C3050 CT2 Plus Canada C3050 Etiquette USA e base station kit e base station kit e handsets C3050 e hand
79. 02 1 Contents 17 Upgrading from an Existing Norstar System 0 0000 cece eee ee ee 74 Determining System Capacity y 6 44 694448 444 14h ead P44 MG Gea sss 74 Understanding DS30 Channel Numbers 0 00 ee eae 75 SEEE PETET ERT E EET E E A EET TE EE 76 Determining Module Channel Requirements aaaea 77 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit 79 Preparation Checklist 22222 ccccudiacdasudcandacsasgecuccdacadecsaacaas 79 Environment Checklist s edo 48a ON Re RE Cee PRR SOM Le OL 79 Elecro OA MeQuironemns lt a ccanaeereandaapeecaneaneeaiwasenahetaneead 80 Internal Wiring Requirements 00000 eee ee 80 Digital Woon s ponds PO Sis wooed eee Ae Seale heh Seer eeta 80 PNOO LODD i ie eee AL HOMO E E R EEE RY 81 System Equipment and Supplies 2 0 ica 0c2cctdciaes care deedaecen seaeneann ue 81 Peale IMC vada Sikes a e aoe A KORE eek Doe AA 81 Opional BOUIN 6 2 becca aaa ea Raae AAR ARL GA RRA RLA ARR GRR RG 81 Companion EQUIPMENT ai 5405404 beha i drs eedeg essa beads dia eedead cba be 82 Optional Companion Equipment 00002 c eee eee 82 DECT EQUINE 22icteidantcgnearede tose ti AnNa REEN ERS AE ES 82 Equipment for Installing the Base Unit 200 eee eee eee 82 GI050 CGT2 Plus Gangda 1cccasaa cede eeeueeaheeernad a bess 82 C3050 Etiquette USA 2sc0cces eee iwi adhe nerede tu n iesea ewe sd 82 Installing the Server ina Rack wok dink eee d
80. 1 HOMO AWN s s a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 1 Note If the Initialization Menu screen appears instead of the Main Menu shown above your Business Communications Manager system is not initialized correctly 9 Ifyou just want to change the IP addressing enter 2 System Configuration and follow the prompts Installation and Maintenance Guide 134 Chapter 9 Starting the System 10 If you want to configure the system through the serial port enter 3 Configuration Wizard This wizard also allows you to change the IP addressing information This Wizard has the same information as the Quick Start Wizard that you access through the Unified Manager but in a slightly different format Refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide for a detailed description of the fields that occur in the Configuration Wizard Note When you change IP address Region Template and or Start DN the system prompts you for a restart after you accept the changes After the system restarts you can continue with your system configuration Warning Changing this information on an existing system completely erases the telephony programming and disables the telephony system It also reboots the Business Communications Manager base unit and expansion unit Using an Ethernet Crossover Cable You use an ethernet crossover cable connected to a computer with a network card to connect your computer to
81. 2 5 Programming Operations Guide Figure 15 shows the front of the module Figure 15 DTM module LEDs and connectors front view Power LED Status LED In Service LED Loopback Test LED Continuity Loopback Receive LEDs Transmit LED Loopback Front view RJ48C digital telephone line connector lt i a Table 5 provides a description of the function for each DTM LEDs Table 5 DTM LED functions Power Q On indicates that the DTM is receiving 5 volts Status On indicates there is data communication between the DTM and the MSC card In Service Flashing indicates that the T1 ETSI or PRI trunks are out of service because a loopback test is running or the DTM is initializing Loopback On indicates a continuity loopback test is running Receive Alarm On indicates a problem with the received digital transmission This half duplex link does not work Receive Error On indicates a small error as a result of degraded digital transmission Possible causes are an ohmic connection water ingress or too long a loop Transmit Alarm On indicates the DTM cannot transmit The DTM sends an Alarm indication signal AIS to the terminating switch This half duplex link does not work Installation and Maintenance Guide 58 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware Table 5 DTM LED functions Continued Transmit Error On indicates the DTM is sending a remote alarm indication R
82. 2 Line jack Connect the other end to an available station port on the Business Communications Manager For a 120 V or 230 V system plug the DIN connector of the power supply cord into the power supply connector receptacle Plug the adapter into a standard ac outlet Caution In North America the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 must be powered from a Class 2 power source that is UL and CSA approved In Europe the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 must be powered from a Class II power source that is CE marked Mounting the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 After the ATA 2 is correctly connected you can mount the unit on a wall as described in this section 1 When using 0 5 mm wire 24AWG select a location within 800 m 2 600 ft of the Business Communications Manager system Allow 12 5 cm 5 in clearance for the line jack terminal jack and power supply connector Screw two 4 mm 8 screws into the wall 130 mm 5 1 4 in away from each other Leave 6 mm 1 4 in of the two screws showing Align the slots at the back of the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 unit over the screws Push the unit against the wall The line jack terminal jack and power supply connector must be at the top of the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Refer to Figure 78 on page 188 Installation and Maintenance Guide 188 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters Figure 78 ATA 2 back view
83. 206 Figure 91 Harddisk replacement overview 000 e eee eee 209 Figure 92 Hard disk wiring and screw locations 2 0 hardware 210 Figure 93 Hard disk screw locations 2 5 version hardware 211 Figure 94 Remove the brackets from the hard disk 0 000 eee eee 211 Figure 95 Connect the brackets to the harddisk 2020000eees 212 Figure 96 Initialization Menu screen 0 2 0 213 Figure 97 Platform Initialization Menu screen 0 0 0 eee 214 Figure 98 Platform Initialization Menu screen 2000 eee eee ee 214 Figure 99 Fan replacement Overview 2 604c0eesiee cde esdewe vads tia tr DERE 217 Figure 100 Business Communications Manager base unit operational LEDs 218 Figure 101 Remove the fan cable from motherboard pre 2 5 chassis 219 Figure 102 Remove the fan cables from SSM board 2 5 models 220 Figure 103 Removing the fan 2 5 single fan model 0000 000 221 Figure 104 Screw attachments beside fan holes 2 5 redundant model 221 Figure 105 Installing piggy backed fans 0 0 eee eee 222 Figure 106 Connect the redundant fan cable to the adapter 223 Figure 107 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 0 models 224 Figure 108 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 5 redundancy models 224 Figure 109 Standard power supply replacement overview 2 5 227
84. 29 signal ground common return 127 slot cover lock 241 slot cover screw 241 software Attendant Console 45 features 45 restart 207 TSP 47 South America supported languages 256 space requirements 79 Installation and Maintenance Guide 304 Index specifications system standards 11 SSM board 220 standard power supply 227 start DN 96 startup monitor LEDs 118 restarting after shutdown 204 system 118 Station Auxiliary Power Supply see SAPS station media bay module 4X16 combination module 61 ASM and ASM 8 modules 62 DSM 16 and DSM 32 60 station module amphenol connector 141 wiring 141 station modules ASM switch settings 109 ASM wiring chart 143 DSM switch settings 111 overview 60 rules for assigning 95 subnet mask default 125 130 supplies installation checklist 81 surge arrestor Companion U S 173 surge protector 175 proprietary extension cable 171 warning 171 wire gauge 174 surge protectors 171 Symbols 29 system networking card combinations 126 required parameters 130 system capacity 74 system components 35 system defaults by region 264 system features 45 system management PC requirements 69 system required parameters 130 system restart 206 system setup choosing region and template 135 system shutdown 209 system startup choosing a region and template 135 system status monitor 199 T T1 DTM module 57 network interface card 40 TAPI LAN CTE 47 Personal Ca
85. 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available Installation and Maintenance Guide 108 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 4X16 Switch Settings The 4X16 module combines a CTM and a DSM 16 The CTM only requires four lines on the DS30 channel Therefore it can be assigned any of the four offsets in a DS30 channel The DSM module then automatically assigns the next DS30 channel number and all the assigned DNs This module can be combined with three other CTMs or one CTM 8 on the same DS30 channel Table 19 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the assigned lines and dialing numbers DNs for each DS30 channel Table 19 4X16 switch settings Select Select Enter these switch settings seeds And this Custom DN aie offset 1 2 3 4 5 6 these lines saa get range on on on on on on 0 211 214 219 222 DS30 2 _ off channel 3 PIED e _off oR 235 238 181 184 ES 189 192 DS30 3 Eem _off channel 4 2 197 200 253 268 3 A i Ea 205 208 0 on on on on on 151 154 167 170 269 284 ul 159 162 DS30 4 _ off _ off channel 5 eal 175 178 121 124 on on on 129 132 DS30 5 M _off off channel 6 2 es 1 71 28530 3 on oe eee e P0937235 02 1 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 109 Table 19 4X16 switch settings Continued 337 Select Se
86. 47 Analog Terminal Adapter cccccceee cece eee OER ee ee eR 147 Central Answering Position CAP wuss kk ee es ae le 148 Telephone Port and DN Cross reference 200c cece eee e eee 148 Installing an Emergency Telephone 0 eee eee eee 149 Installing IFP Telephones esre eset Cte bes het ce 150 Installing Radio based Portable Systems 0 000 cee eee eee eee 151 Companion Wireless Systems 0 00 cece ee eee 151 PECTOS EME 2ch4 Gate un r ater sethseu chet aE a 151 Recording Installed Seis cceccceeeve ered seid eee ede ds dees ded Cee ed 152 Movmg Te cs oscar eee dee eds hk DIME Ce whee eee ha seme ewe 4 154 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 0000 eee eee eee 155 The Companion Wireless System 000 ccc eee eee eee 155 Companion Components istics dip deed nt ode coke vr deg wired se cag tades 156 Installing the Companion Hardware 000 uaaa cece eee 157 Installing a RPI for the Base Stations srrerrrereruirsirarisrorsruidas 157 Mounting the RPLUNT hss kee as eS hc rii cS acces ok ch Sela a 158 Wiring the and Connecting the AP sc 6sc cedeaineeedngess ine aans 161 Installing Companion Base Stations 0 0000 cee ee 167 Positioning a Companion Base Station 00 c cee eens 167 Attaching a Companion Base Station 0 060 c eee eee ee 168 Registering Companion Sets 60 c cece eee eee 170 Mes arin Bie SUSIGIN 6 ce nb aw a
87. 5 Figure 15 DTM module LEDs and connectors front view 0 5 57 Figure 16 CTMandCTM8 LEDS and jacks 0 cece eee 58 Fig re 17 BRILEDSandjacks sie cate de ce ee koe de dunt Enana Ra ee ak ee 59 Figure 18 Faceplates of DSM 16 and DSM 82 cs dea dee een nn ew nee waned 61 Figure 19 Faceplate of 4X16 module LEDS connectors and jacks 61 Figore 20 ASM 8 WOMVIOW cies ice eres naitwa dii dee Pe ee eee eed 62 Figure 21 DECT faceplate with eight RJ45 connectors 00 000 63 Figure 22 DECT DIP switches 2 2 2 0 cc8seeceaaterarnsnedeeinnsancnnass 64 Pooc PER LEDS sa2decig2ecseeivede con suee teens eeenutesnteesaeds 64 Figure 24 Process for determining modules 0 0000 eee eee eee 71 Figure 25 DS30 channel model 2 0000 cee eee 75 Figure 26 Offsets are part of DS30 channel line groups 2 76 Figure 27 Space requirements for media bay modules 005 77 Figure 28 Attaching the rack mounting bracket to the base unit 83 Figure 29 Fasten the base unit to the equipment rack 0000 00 ee 84 Figure 30 Attaching the mounting brackets to the base unit 85 Figure 31 Mount the Business Communications Manager base unit on the wall 86 Figure 32 Attach the rack mounting bracket to the expansion unit 89 Figure 33 Fasten the expansion unit to the equipment rack 90 Figure 34 Atta
88. 53 system restart 206 trunk modules 4X16 description 39 BRIM S T 59 CTM description 39 CTM CTM8 58 DTM 57 DTM description 39 rules for assigning 95 wiring 137 TSP overview 47 see LAN CTE twisted pair cable 80 two line display M7310N 65 M7316 65 M7324 65 M7324N 65 U Unified Manager configuring the PC 135 keycodes 136 PC requirements 69 uninterruptible power supply see UPS universal service code USOC 5 update power supply 230 upgrade power supply 231 UPS RPI 157 US regulations FCC 7 user ID Hyperterminal 133 using your equipment 10 UTAM 167 170 V V 35 adapter cable wiring 129 V 90 modem data parameter 130 voice applications 183 voice channels changing the channel split 75 Voice Manager 45 voice over IP 47 VoIP Gateway 47 12050 soft phone 47 IP telephone 47 65 150 voltage checking before startup 122 power supply switch 122 requirements 80 volume 196 W wall mounting bracket 91 wallboards Call Center Reporting 46 WAN media services card 40 network standards 5 required parameters 130 wiring 127 Warning symbol 29 weight installing on table 92 wide area network seWAN wire color 142 143 148 163 273 wire gauge surge protector 174 wireless adding to system 155 base station installation 167 Installation and Maintenance Guide 306 Index DECT module 40 handsets Etiquette C3050 CT2 Companion 67 handsets installing 151 registering handsets Compan
89. 6 Rights of theT elecommunications Company 0060 cee ee eee eee 6 PGE Ge asiniata cine a Selah eh aa an ahd ak ase an dil aude mappa alae ea egies 6 Canadian Regulations please read carefully 20 0 0 cece eens 6 US Regulations please read carefully 0 0 7 Federal Communications Commission FCC Notice T EMVEMC FCG Pat I5 rcrrrisdre ner trnu AEE AE EEE E RA 9 Important Safety STON ssrcssrcenradapati paiia d ag aiya lain a 9 international Regulatory Information 2cccnecds ren cae as heen narrante rarka 11 SE urdani rake ETA n REANA TAAL RA NAATA RAN 11 Additional Safety Information 00 000 cece tee 13 Limited Warranty lt 2 2008 00 eee eee tee ee eRe EER EEE EERE KERR REE ee 13 NETH tap ohne Steere pia spk AR E we shal E r E 13 Waranty Repair Devic8S cecaaieunaeneneeetdecqmeenaacauaeetande 14 After Waranty ServiC sicseisibeissetad hho Gets dba iaaa E k 14 PIGS oi consi docs ob ecoe dotierte pi rene Anann ta nai 29 Svmbols vsed im thie GUNE i ahaa as i a i y a a do leat ied ese se 29 POOO aaa as aa aa a ae ae S SS 30 AOM eiaa iA aa a TE PAs eReE sate 30 Related publications 2 25 48 58656 26 RRR R HALA KR Rede Redd ede 32 How to Get Help lt ccccceceucevese ee nest ecagvadeodddneeeedcacedeceads 33 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 35 Business Communications Manager System Components 35 Computer Components 6 c
90. 6 3 ASM8 4 Eem 4 DSM 16 m Trunk modules are assigned in this order of AXIO priority 5 Start with the last available oe are 5 BRI Bae coene part of the 4X16 CTM 6 CTM8 MoM e BI SpE Jus 7 DECT mna 7 Lines start at 61 on DS30 channel 7 3 5 channel split DSM 32 Module 7 is not available to any module if your system has been Companion configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split Modules that require two DS30 channels such as the DSM32 and the 4X16 must be assigned to channels higher than 6 to allow all their channels to be active Companion Only a maximum of 16 Companion base stations 30 handsets can be registered on a system configured with a 3 5 split Installation and Maintenance Guide 98 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings Determining Module DIP Switch Settings After you determine in which order you want to assign the modules you determine the specific switch settings for each module 1 Use Table 12 on page 99 to determine a switch setting for all modules except the DECT and FEM modules Figure 38 shows an example of the table and how to do the following steps Step 1 On Table 12 circle the module names Step 2 Number the order in which you want to assign the modules Step 3 Determine the number of DS30 channels each module requires Step 4 Circle the DS30 channel and offset numbers Step 5 Follow the DS30 channel and offset number t
91. 7 234 0 181 188 1 189 196 2 197 204 0 151 158 1 159 166 2 167 174 0 121 128 1 129 136 2 137 144 0 91 98 1 99 106 2 107 114 0 61 68 1 69 76 2 77 84 Installation and Maintenance Guide 104 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings CTM Switch Settings There are two models of CTMs e CTMs have four lines therefore you can add a maximum of four CTMs per DS30 channel e CTMB8s have eight lines This module uses two offset settings per module Therefore you can add a maximum of two CTM8 modules per DS30 channel e You can also mix the two modules For instance if you have two existing CTM modules with offset 0 and 1 you can add a CTM8 on offset 2 CTM The CTM provides connections for four analog calling line identification CLID PSTN lines Each voice line uses one line in the offset Since each DS30 channel has four lines per offset you can assign a maximum of four CTMs to a single DS30 channel by making the offset switch settings different for each module You can also combine three CTMs with the trunk module part of the 4X16 module on the same DS30 channel Table 17 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 17 CTM switch settings Select Select Enter these switch settings on on on on on on To assign ener offset 4 2 3 4 5 e these lines 0 211 214 1 on on on on on 219 222 2 oft 2 on on on
92. AI carrier failure alarm CFA to the terminating switch If the Transmit Alarm is not on this error indicates a far end or cable problem All LEDS flashing All LEDs flashing continuously indicates that the DTM is initializing TIP You can install a maximum of three DTM modules in the Business Communications Manager system depending on the available channels Caller ID Trunk Media Bay Module North American systems only The CTM and CTM 8 have the same functions e The Caller ID Trunk media bay module CTM connects a maximum of four analog calling line ID CLID interfaces to the Business Communications Manager system via four RJ11 jacks on the module face These jacks are labeled Line 1 Auxiliary Line 2 Line 3 and Line 4 The auxiliary jack connects to Line 1 e The CTM8 provides eight analog CLID interfaces to the Business Communications Manager via eight RJ11 jacks on the module face Each jacks also supports disconnect supervision There are also two auxiliary jacks on this module which connect to Line 1 and Line 5 The auxiliary ports permit the connection of aV 90 modem FAX machine or single line analog telephone When the auxiliary device is active the Business Communications Manager system blocks the associated line Conversely when the line is active the auxiliary port line is blocked When you connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port you can use it as an emergency telephone beca
93. AIONG ccccccakaters ee dew deere eee ateeeanaans eeee noes 272 System SOU siridan eiere n a baie bade eebe ees dadiebaads 272 Set DNs and Port Numbers sssr decade G ae aecandeerdneane saweleondeawee ee 273 GIOSEANY cto cdi essere sti das dss dncdiesnedasaaseieigedeiaesaiad 275 js eee eee rr ee rer errr Te eT Tere rT Te Tere er Te Te rT 291 P0937235 02 1 23 Figures Figure 1 Business Communications Manager core system components overview 35 Figure2 External functional hardware base unit 2 002e00ee 36 Figure 3 Base unit interior components for standard system pre 2 5 37 Figure4 Base Unit interior components with a standard power supply system 2 5 38 Figure5 Base unit interior components for a redundant system 2 5 38 Figure6 MSC optional equipment ports 0 00 c eee eee 41 Figure 7 Base unit external points of connection 0002ce eee eee 43 Figure 8 Business Communications Manager base unit operational LEDs 44 Figure9 DS256 connector on base unit and expansion unit 49 Figure 10 Installation and initialization overview 00 cee eee 50 Figure 11 Telephony hardware components 0 0 eee eee eee eee 53 Fig r 12 Module LED locane alk wad Ree dee am Dele Eup asin a deed E 54 Figure 13 Rear of modules showing DS256 channel and power connectors 55 Figure 14 Underside of module showing DIP switches 0 5
94. BRI or the RJ11 sockets CTM and 4X16 modules 2 Wire one end of the cable to the telco demarcation blocks of the building e Figure 51 shows the wiring pin outs for a DTM to connect to a service provider Figure 51 DTM RJ48C wiring array DTM connector To network To plug O O o000 F z Receive from 1 Rring network 2 Rtip RJ48C jack 3 Rshield ye Transmit to network 4 Tring 12345678 5 Ttip 6 Tshield Warning If you are using a service provider channel service unit CSU you must disable the Business Communications Manager system internal CSU using Business Communications Manager Unified Manager For more information refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide e Figure 52 shows the wiring pin out for a CTM a CTM8 or the CTM jacks on a 4X16 module to connect to the service provider All the modules have an auxiliary jack the CTM8 has two Do not attempt to plug digital equipment into this jack Figure 52 CTM RJ11 wiring array CTM Auxiliary jack connector Pin connection 060g g ne RJ11 sockets 4 Tip The CTM 8 has eight RJ11 jacks including two auxiliary jacks The 4X16 media bay module has four RJ11 jacks Installation and Maintenance Guide 140 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules e Figure 53 shows the wiring pin out for an BRI to the service provider Wa
95. Fasten the rack mounting brackets to the rack using four screws not supplied Refer to Figure 29 Figure 29 Fasten the base unit to the equipment rack o o o ae o mis o ne has Q b g 8 6 o wa KRY S K DANN Cai SS o y K oO 0000 OY G2Q000000000 FCC a ees h fo o o ad x pOOO0OO Installing the Base Unit on the Wall To mount the Business Communications Manager base unit on the wall you need e two rack mounting brackets or a wall mount bracket kit e four 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws e aplywood backboard 2 cm 3 4 in thick Caution Refer to Environment Checklist on page 79 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the Business Communications Manager base unit P0937235 02 1 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit 85 Follow these steps to install the bracket Note You may use the two rack mounting brackets to do a wall installation Or you can order a wall mount kit which contains a bracket that runs the entire length of the base unit Refer to Figure 30 1 Align the screw holes on one side of the base unit with both rack mounting brackets or with one of the wall mounting brackets Note The brackets suspend the Business Communications Manager base unit on the wall Consider the direction you want the media bay modules to face left or
96. M Rls ID 2 5 RC 10 Version 7 1 8 Hardware Profile 2 CORE UPLOAD Notes Indicates the hardware profile detected on this system Indicates the hardware profile configured on this system PRESS a NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 M P0937235 02 1 Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard Disk 215 a The current MSC configuration is indicated with two asterisks Note the Image column If you want to change this select 6 Select an alternate MSC image to load The system checks to see if a core upload is required This takes about 45 minutes If you do not want to change the MSC load enter the number of the selection with the asterisks 4 The system automatically reboots as part of the initialization process When the process is complete the telnet session disconnects 5 Do one of the following e Run the Quick Start Wizard to create the system parameters and defaults Then restore your system data from your backup disk e Restore system and data information from your backup disk Note The detailed processes for performing steps 4 and 5 are contained in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 216 Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard Disk P0937235 02 1 217 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan Cooling fans circulate air through the chassis of the Business Communications Manager base unit and expansion unit to
97. Manager system there are no media bay modules installed in the Business Communications Manager base unit or Business Communications Manager expansion unit This configuration allows you to select the number and type of media bay modules that best meet your requirements If you have a large Business Communications Manager system there are some configuration restrictions that can apply to your system For information about these restrictions refer to Rules for Assigning DS30 Channel Hierarchy on page 95 Figure 24 Process for determining modules Determine trunk Determine which and extension DS30 channels requirements are available Determine DS30 channel requirements Set DIP switches on modules for each module Install modules into the server or expansion cabinet Determine if any offsets can be used The first step in selecting the media bay modules is to determine the number of extensions internal lines and PSTN lines trunk lines you have or need This determines how many media bay modules you require and what type of modules you require These following sections describe how to determine which modules and how many you require for your system After you determine which modules you want to use you must ensure they fit into the available system resources These sections describe how the modules work within the available DS30 channels of the Business Communications Ma
98. NC connectors Lightning surge arrestor with mounting bracket v to base station or proprietary extension cable Installing an Outdoor Antenna USA To install an outdoor antenna follow these steps Make a hole for the coaxial cable Install conduit for the antenna cable according to local building and wiring codes Screw the antenna bracket to the wall so that the antenna is vertical on the exterior wall of the building 4 Loosen the nut on the antenna P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 173 5 Slide the antenna into the slot of the bracket and tighten the nut Refer to Figure 67 6 Feed the coaxial cable through the wall to the lightning surge protector on the interior wall Figure 67 Antenna with antenna bracket USA 1 x Installing a Lightning Surge Protector USA Install the lightning surge protector to protect the Companion components from electrical surges To install a lightning surge protector follow these steps 1 Install the lightning surge protector on the interior wall as close as possible to the entry point of the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna Before you connect the ground lead to the lightning surge protector attach the ground lead to an approved ground Refer to the Wiring information tips box on the next page Route and connect the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna to the lightning surge protecto
99. O O Ol ck h h l of OOOO O olj Me ol fe a O o oo 0000 s 8 fool LI o DS256 connector P0937235 02 1 Chapter 6 Installing the Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit 93 2 Plug the other end of the cable into the DS256 connector on the faceplate of the MSC in the Business Communications Manager base unit Refer to Figure 36 Figure 36 Business Communications Manager base unit DS258 connector DS256 connector Warning The timing in the Business Communications Manager system is designed for a 5 m 16 ft Category 5 patch cable The system cannot work properly if you connect the Business Communications Manager expansion unit using a cable that is any other length Installation and Maintenance Guide 94 Chapter 6 Installing the Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit P0937235 02 1 95 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings Before you install a media bay module assign switch settings for the media bay module These settings determine which line numbers trunks or DNs extensions the equipment connected to the module will have access to The DIP switches are located on the back or underside of the media bay module Note Fiber Expansion Module FEM switches gt The switches on the fiber expansion module FEM do not work in the sam
100. Power Supply This section describes the steps for removing an existing standard power supply and replacing it with a redundant power supply After the redundant power supply is installed insert the two power supply modules Redundant power supply modules can be changed while the system is running as long as one of the modules remains active Note When you upgrade to a redundant power supply you must also put in a redundant fan Refer to Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan on page 217 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting Down the System Software on page 204 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the Business Communications Manager base unit for maintenance as described in Shutting Down the System Hardware on page 204 3 Disconnect the power supply from the internal connections 4 Cut the cable ties that hold the power cables to the base unit 5 Remove the power supply bracket screw Refer to Figure 113 Figure 113 Removing power supply bracket Power supply bracket screw Installation and Maintenance Guide 232 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply 6 Remove the power supply bracket 7 Remove the four power supply screws from the back of the base unit Note Figure 114 shows the back of a Business Communications Manager base unit version 2 5 If the unit was delivered with two fans both set
101. Programming You must enable Music for callers on Hold and for Background Music through programming Refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide for more details P0937235 02 1 197 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting This chapter describes how some troubleshooting options for determining the cause of misfunctions or failure of the Business Communications Manager hardware To analyze a Business Communications Manager problem you must determine the cause of the problem and if there is a damaged hardware component After you have corrected the problem test the Business Communications Manager system to confirm that the system is functioning correctly h Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Hardware problems appear as any of the following e The operational LEDs on the Business Communications Manager base unit or on the media bay modules are not reacting as expected e Business Communications Manager system does not function at all e The emergency telephone does not function e ATA 2 does not function Installation and Maintenance Guide 198 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Using the System Status Monitor to Monitor LEDs The LEDs on the Business Communications Manager base unit are part of the System Status Monitor SSM board Figure 84
102. TCM 5 OBIX5 TCM 7 OBIX7 IBIX3 TCM 9 OBIX9 TCM 11 OBIX11 TCM 13 OBIX13 TCM 15 OBIX15 RPI 8 BIX Wiring Chart Table 40 lists the wiring chart for the RPI 8 BIX Table 40 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart White Blue Blue White White Green Green White TCM White Slate Slate White Installation and Maintenance Guide 164 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Table 40 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart Continued Red Orange Orange Red Red Brown Brown Red Black Blue Blue Black Black Green Green Black Black Slate Slate Black Yellow Orange Orange Yellow Yellow Brown 19 OBIX7 Brown Yellow BS7 46 PWR Violet Blue Blue Violet Violet Green Green Violet P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 165 RPI 8 BIX Wiring Chart Table 41 lists the wiring chart for the RPI 16 BIX Table 41 RPI 16 BIX wiring chart 26 PWR White Blue 1 OBIX9 Blue White BS9 PWR White Green Green White White Slate Slate White Red Orange 7 OBIX11 Orange Red BS11 PWR Red Brown Brown Red Black Blue Blue Black Black Green 13 OBIX13 Green Black BS13 PWR Black Slate 15 Slate Black Installation and Maintenance Guide 166 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Table 41 RPI 16 BIX wiring chart Continued Yellow Orange Orange Yellow Yellow Bro
103. The following symbols appear in this guide Caution Caution Symbol Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment Danger Electrical Shock Hazard Symbol Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock Note Note Symbol Warning Warning Symbol A Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to work improperly or to fail Alerts you to important information Tip Tip Symbol Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task Installation and Maintenance Guide 30 Preface Warning Grounding Symbol Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap before performing the maintenance procedure Ns Warning Disconnect Symbol Alerts you to remove the Business Communications Manager and Business Communications Manager expansion cabinet power cords from the AC outlet before performing any maintenance procedure Text conventions This guide uses the following text conventions bold Courier text Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter in italic text a command line interface Example Use the dinfo command Example Enter show ip alerts routes Indicates file and directory names new terms book titles Web addresses and variables in command syntax descriptions bold text Indicates command names screen titles options and text for a graphical user interface GUT an
104. a bay module you want to install Tip Create a label with the DS30 channel and DIP switch settings and stick it to the front of the module to provide ease of reference for maintenance activities 5 You are now ready to install the modules into the Business Communications Manager Refer to Chapter 9 Starting the System on page 121 for details P0937235 02 1 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 101 Line and Extension Numbers for Specific Modules The switch settings on the media bay module determine the line numbers and extension numbers the modules use The tables in this section show the correspondence between DS30 channel numbers switch settings and the line extension numbers for each type of module The DS30 channel and switch settings correspond with Table 12 on page 99 DTM Switch Settings Although DTMs have more than 16 lines they occupy only one DS30 channel per DTM Table 13 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 13 DTM switch settings T1 Select DS30 Enter these switch settings To assign these channel T 2713 4j 5 16 lines 9 on jon lon lon lon lon T 3 on lon jon lon lon TE on lon lon jon on 4 151 173 O a ee 5 on on on on 121 143 O DOREEN OO 6 on on on on on 91 113 on on on on 61 83 17 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available
105. a bays 36 memory 244 247 memory amount 36 Message Networking requires keycode 46 PCI slots 36 Personal Call Manager 47 ports 43 power supply 227 Professional Call Center requires keycode 46 QoS Routing 48 remove base unit cables for shutdown 204 removing the hard disk 210 replacing fan 217 restart 206 shutdown 204 station media bay modules 60 supported adapters 40 supported telephones 40 system components 35 system features 45 telephony components 39 TSP 47 VoIP Gateway requires keycode 47 wiring requirements 80 C cables analog digital length 80 DB15 X 21 adapter cable 129 fan cable adapter 223 labelling 204 maximum distance 161 modem card DB25 128 power supply 231 power supply removing 228 removing before shutdown 116 shock warning 209 shutdown remove 204 V 35 adapter cable wiring 129 calendar battery removing 250 Call Center Agents key code required 45 Call Center Agents requires keycode 45 Call Center overview 46 Call Center Reporting requires a keycode 46 Call Center Reporting requires keycode 46 Call Detail Recording 46 call information recording 46 call management Attendant Console 45 call statistics Clarify Call Center Reporting 46 Caller ID by region 257 CTM description 39 internal lines 60 caller directed transfer Call Center 46 CallPilot Manager 45 Canadian Regulations 6 cannot connect to network 134 CAP International only 66 Installation and Maint
106. ada CS 03 and US Federal Commission FCC Part 68 and has been registered under files Industry Canada 332 5980 A and FCC AB6CAN 20705 KF E key system AB6CAN 20706 MF E hybrid system and AB6CAN 23740 PF E PBX system Connection of the Business Communications Manager telephone system to the nationwide telecommunications network is made through a standard network interface jack that you can order from your local telecommunications company This type of customer provided equipment cannot be used on party lines or coin lines Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution User
107. age and wiring are correct for you system before you connect any of the units to the power source Incorrect power settings result in equipment damage Read the following warnings You must protect yourself and the Business Communications Manager units from possible electrical shocks A Warning Use only qualified persons to service the system The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the appropriate training and experience Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and ac mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place at the completion of any servicing Warning Leakage currents Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord System shutdown You must disconnect the media bay module cabl
108. al call using the telephone connected to the ATA 2 Next call the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 from an system telephone Refer to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 User Guide for details Installation and Maintenance Guide 190 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters ATA 2 Data Communication The Business Communications Manager ATA 2 connects a standard analog data device such as a FAX or modem to the Business Communications Manager system This section shows the additional steps required to install ATA 2 for data communication Data Transmission Requirements When using the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 for data transmission the analog loop resistance must not exceed 200 ohms for example 730 m of 0 4 mm wire or 2 400 ft of 26 AWG wire The external line assigned to the ATA 2 must follow the transmission network requirements described in the data communication device specifications Transmission rates baud over 1 200 bps require a modulation design compatible with the telephone line bandwidth Use a conditioned external line to prevent data corruption during transmission Note Maximum loss from the ATA 2 analog terminal to the CO must be 10 dB or less at 1 kHz If the loss exceeds this limit condition the line This loss ensures correct data transmission for different types of data terminals FAX and Modem Transmission Compatibility The Business Communications Manager ATA 2 is co
109. al loop resistance is less than or equal to 200 ohms Note If necessary install the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 near to the data communication device to maintain a maximum loop resistance of less than 200 ohms When using 0 4 mm wire 26 AWG the ATA 2 must be within 800 m 2 600 ft of the Business Communications Manager system 4 Disconnect the single line telephone from the ATA 2 5 Plug the data communication device into ATA 2 Installation and Maintenance Guide 192 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters P0937235 02 1 193 Chapter 14 Installing Optional Telephony Equipment This chapter tells you how to connect the optional ringer page and music telephony equipment to the media services card MSC connectors on the front of the Business Communications Manager base unit Auxiliary Ringer customer supplied An auxiliary ringer is a customer supplied piece of hardware that provides external ringing capability to telephones on the Business Communications Manager if the telephones are set to allow it To install this equipment follow these steps 1 Use the installation instructions that came with the ringer hardware to install the auxiliary ringer 2 Connect the ringer generator miniature jack to the auxiliary ringer output on the MSC Refer to Figure 80 Figure 80 Auxiliary ringer jack Auxiliary ringer jack MSC faceplate Ring Tip C Sleeve Auxiliary ringer
110. als between its components and the Business Communications Manager Conference A feature that allows the user to establish a three way call D channel Data channel An ISDN standard transmission channel which is packet switched The channel is used for call setup signaling and data transmission data link connection indentifier DLCI The DLCI is used to identify a PVC in frame relay networks DECT cordless telephone system Hand held wireless telephones that allow complete mobility within the reach of DECT base stations Portable telephones provide many but not all standard system features They also share some of the same programming as desk telephones Delayed Ring Transfer DRT to prime This feature allows the system to transfer unanswered calls on external line to the prime telephone related to the called set The number of rings can be adjusted Activate this feature under Feature settings in System programming dial up connection A dial up connection is a temporary connection between computers This connection is established over an analog or digital telephone line dialing restriction Restrictions are numbers you cannot dial when the dialing filter with those numbers is in effect Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS DPNSS is a networking protocol that provides operators with access to Enterprise Edge features over multiple combined networks Corporate offices separated geographically can be lin
111. amming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for calling before hanging up 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early mornings or late evenings P0937235 02 1 EMI EMC FCC Part 15 Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsib
112. an add varies depending on the DS30 resources that are available Refer to Figure 27 on page 77 Figure 40 Overview of installing a media bay module Set module DIP switches Disconnect cables Restore power to from the front of the base unit and server and expansion expansion unit cabinet Disconnect power from Reconnect all cables both units Remove front bezel Monitor LEDs for from the base unit or power and status expansion unit Install new module Replace coverplate Is this installation part of a new system installation Use the Unified Manager to identify the module to the system Continue with system initialization Installation and Maintenance Guide 116 Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules Shutting Down the System Before you perform any maintenance procedures read the following warnings to ensure you and your system are properly protected Warning If you are installing a new system or new base unit or expansion unit refer ie to Chapter 11 Installing Telephones and Peripherals on page 147 for instructions about installing a new system before you connect the system to the ac power outlet Warning DO NOT continue with module installation until you ensure the base unit and expansion unit are set to the correct voltages version 2 0 systems with standard power supply
113. ance Guide 272 Media Bay Module Combinations Changing Configurations Here are some points to consider when changing modules in existing or in new Business Communications Manager systems e Trunk and analog station modules cannot share a DS30 channel e Modules that require more than one DS30 channel automatically assign the next channel in chronological order Therefore if an existing installed module uses either of the required DS30 channels remove the installed module You must then assign the DIP switches for both modules so there is no conflict between them or with any other installed module e The goal is to have a balanced mix of trunk and station modules e Write the DIP switch settings for each module in a place that is handy to reference when you decide to change or add modules e If you update your Norstar system to Business Communications Manager your station amphenol connectors can be connected into the media bay modules without adjustment Trunk connectors must be converted to RJ11 CTM or RJ45 BRI connectors However if you use the FEM module to connect your Norstar modules to the Business Communications Manager the station wiring needs to be adjusted Refer to FEM Wiring on page 144 System Setup Use the following table to make a note of your basic system setup Post this page near the Business Communications Manager hardware for future reference Media bay module DIP switch setting
114. annel Numbers on page 75 for more information about 2 6 and 3 5 DS30 channel splits e DSM 32 modules require two DS30 channel numbers When you assign the first DS30 channel number to an DSM 32 the module automatically adds the next DS30 channel number For example if you assign DS30 channel number 2 to an DSM 32 it uses DS30 channel Installation and Maintenance Guide 96 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings numbers 2 and 3 However you cannot choose DS30 channel 7 for the DSM32 module because the second level of DSM lines would not be accessible Refer to DSM Switch Settings on page 111 e The DIP switches on the 4X16 module are used to set the DS30 channel and offset for the CTM part of the module The module automatically assigns an additional DS30 channel for the 16 DSM lines However you cannot choose DS30 channel 7 for the 4X16 module because the DSM lines would not be accessible Refer to 4X16 Switch Settings on page 108 e Companion configure the DSM or DSMs handling Business Communications Manager Companion to DS30 channel 6 or 7 You must change the module number of any trunk media bay modules configured to module 6 or 7 to an unassigned module number to prevent conflicts with Companion Note Companion DS30 split restrictions gt If you choose a 3 5 channel split for your system the second module cannot be assigned Therefore you can add a maximum of 16 Companion base stations which support a maxim
115. application guides and provides a brief description of the application function Programming Operations Guide and Telephone Features Programming Guide These guides provide programming for core telephony features and user features such as Voice telephony configuration for digital IP ISDN and radio based telephones and equipment over analog digital ISDN and voice over IP VoIP trunks How to use and program user telephony features at the telephone Companion Application Server software that controls the interface between the Business Communications Manager system and the Companion wireless system available for selected regions Networking DPNSS upgrade requires keycode provides private voice networking for the UK Market Networking MCDN and EDSI Q SIG Voice Networking requires keycode allows you to network your Business Communications Manager system or a number of Business Communications Manager systems to a Meridian system This allows the network to use a common numbering plan as well as common voice messaging and auto attendant systems connected to the Meridian Data setup applications and protocols to configure the Business Communications Manager system to be part of a LAN orWAN network Refer to the next section for specifics Attendant Console Setup and Operation Guide and Attendant Console User Guide Attendant Console requires keycode provides centralized call management and call activity repor
116. ar battery DIMM slots Media bay module cabinet PCI card slots Caanaa Figure 5 Base unit interior components for a redundant system 2 5 Redundant power supply Redundant fans Hard disk Clock calendar battery EEE iG sestezezezszesestes DIMM slots oa O amp Media bay module PCI card slots cabinet P0937235 02 1 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 39 Power supply The Business Communications Manager base unit can have a single power supply module or a redundant power supply module Single power supply units can also be upgraded to redundant power s
117. assed along on the local LAN copied to another LAN or dropped frame relay A frame relay is a high speed packet switching WAN protocol designed to provide efficient high speed frame or packet transmission with minimum delay Frame relay uses minimal error detection and relies on higher level protocols for error control gateway A system that links two different types of networks and enables them to communicate with each other The Business Communications Manager can provide the gateway to an intranet or internet ground start trunk Ground start trunks provide the same features as loop start trunks Use this type of trunk when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks By configuring lines as ground start the system can identify when a caller hangs up the telephone at the far end Ground start trunks are available only on a Digital Trunk Interface DTI Handsfree A feature used to make calls without using the telephone receiver Activate Full Handsfree under Capabilities in System DNs programming When activated the Business Communications Manager assigns a Handsfree Mute button to the telephone P0937235 02 1 Glossary 281 Handsfree HF Answerback This feature automatically turns on the microphone at a telephone that receives a Voice Call so that the person receiving the call can respond without lifting the receiver Activate Handsfree Answerback under Capa
118. ations as shown in Figure 120 To replace a standard or redundant power supply in a version 2 5 Business Communications Manager expansion unit you can follow the instructions given in the sections noted below e Standard supply expansion unit Replacing a Standard Power Supply on page 227 Refer to Figure 120 e Redundant power supply Replacing a Redundant Power Supply Module on page 235 Refer to Figure 121 and Figure 122 on page 237 Figure 120 Expansion unit standard power supply interior connections cable connectors Power supply screws P0937235 02 1 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply 237 Figure 121 Expansion unit redundant power supply interior connections Power supply screws Fan cables Figure 122 Installing the power module in a redundant expansion unit Installation and Maintenance Guide 238 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply P0937235 02 1 239 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware Besides the hard disk power supply and cooling fans a number of components the Business Communications Manager system uses for data functions can be replaced These components can be replaced Replacing Data Cards WAN cards LAN cards modem cards computer memory PEC cards motherboard battery Depending on your location you can have various configurations of data cards that can include WAN card LAN and modem cards North America onl
119. ations related 32 Q Q SIG Voice Networking requires keycode 45 QoS Routing modem card backup 40 software 48 quick configuration 133 R rack installing in 83 89 installing the base unit 84 mounting bracket installation 83 radio base station Companion 66 DECT 67 radio reception 9 radio frequency interference 3 RAM 36 receive 133 receive clock 127 128 129 receive data 127 128 129 reconnect power 118 red LED 123 218 redundant fan cable adapter 223 label 222 replacing 222 redundant fans replacing 217 redundant hard disk install 212 redundant power supply installing 233 updating 230 region setting 135 regions caller ID 257 companding law 257 ISDN line services support 257 languages 256 line protocol 261 mobility services 259 modules 259 system defaults 264 registration information for telephone company 5 registration number tag 7 relay jack external paging 42 194 Remote Power Interconnect see RPI remove cables 116 cables before shutdown 204 hard disk 210 LAN card 240 power 116 repair authorization 4 authorized supplier 6 returning hard disk 211 replace fan 217 P0937235 02 1 Index 303 hard disk 209 hard disks 209 media bay modules 119 memory DIMM 246 power supply 227 telephone different types 254 telephones 253 telephones same type 253 tools 203 request to send 127 128 129 132 requirements electrical 80 electrical ground 80 environment 79 installation tool
120. bbean Denmark Australia Australia Hong Kong Hong Kong Europe CALA CALA North American North American France Global Global Taiwan Taiwan Germany PRC PRC Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom South American and Central American countries are assigned to regions in the following way e Caribbean includes Antigua Bahamas Barbados Bermuda Cayman Islands Dominican Republic Jamaica USVI Puerto Rico and Trinidad e CALA refers to all other Caribbean and Latin American countries with European based standards Installation and Maintenance Guide 256 System Region Attributes Languages Table 50 lists the languages available for each region and a specific order in which the languages are set as default Table 50 Languages Region Language CALA Caribbean Hong Kong North American PRC Taiwan NA English NA French NA Spanish Australia United Kingdom UK English Denmark Danish Norwegian Swedish NA English France Euro French NA English Germany German NA English Global NA English NA French NA Spanish Turkish Holland Dutch Euro French NA English Italy Italian NA English Norway Norwegian Swedish Danish NA English Spain Euro Spanish NA English Sweden Swedish Norwegian Danish NA English Switzerland German Euro French Italian NA English Table 51 shows a breakdown of the language support for South American and C
121. bilities in System DNs programming Held Line Reminder A telephone rings and displays the message On hold LINENAM when you place an external call on hold for programmed period of time host name The name that identifies a computer on a network that provides services to other computers in the domain such as databases or other Business Communications Manager systems Hotline This feature automatically calls a pre assigned number when the user lifts the telephone receiver or presses the Handsfree Mute button Assign Hotline under Capabilities in System DNs programming Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP The set of rules used for exchanging text graphic images sound video and other multimedia files on the world wide web Hz hertz A unit of measure for indicating frequency in cycles per second Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A digital telephone service that allows for a combination voice and data transfer over a single high speed connection over the same copper twisted pair telephone line as analog telephone service intercom button A button that provides access to internal lines used for calls within a Business Communications Manager system These buttons also provide access to external lines through a line pool or external code Assign intercom buttons under Line access in System DNs programming internal line A line on your telephone dedicated to making calls to destinations inside your system
122. cac dane ccadeedwecaadedunweneeeeaenenataes 36 Hardware Components 2 2 2 c 06e2ta vena edeb ee den eden weseedaneae 36 Telephony Componeme choice te ec aia a dc eb no Raid hi qe ine a 39 Data Networking Components osci sserasiererereiria kissie deia genkai 40 Media SBMICSS Gauari saaa a a a a aaa a beta ee es 41 Installation and Maintenance Guide 16 Contents MSC IP Call Processing Hardware 0 000 c cece eee 42 SUS US MNS che ged de chile desk decd She de Ae heck de deck he be de be hebeclada de Bde te de de de be 43 Business Communications Manager Base Unit LEDS 44 OPS QOUONG 22cretnenagerdid ceeidctaeteesatewteiSeaddes garanehe aa 45 Telephony Features and Options 0 00 eens 45 aid PORES E E we didupee aki E T EET oenegurrek Cer eee ges 48 Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit 0 0 000 49 Installation Process Overview 0 00 ccc eee ene ees 50 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware 00020 e cece eee eeeeeeeee 53 Media Bay Module Common Features 0 000 cece ences 54 LED s 64 p0cdy MAAR SAAS OA OAL ea ee es 54 Power CONNSCHONS ick anccdad dace e Cake isek eRLM MARRS EEKEO RRO ER MES 55 OP SWICKES occeeeeenee seed eeeeeeeseeGeseereteceeeaeceeeaenecaadad 55 Trunk Media Bay Modules aie ah eee Bang aad ue apna hu reacts ae iy ak 56 Digital Tunk Media Bay Module csdeinvdr dd dead de nn bene eek eadeesaaed 57 Caller ID Trunk Media Bay Module
123. cece e eee eee 243 Removing ar replacing a PEC 2260s ieeccebeteevatanedcueaaeds 244 Memory replacement overview 0 000 e eee eee 246 Removing and replacing the DIMMS 2c 0c csieeeseavesdwesanae 247 Battery replacement overview ccc 249 Removing the clock calendar battery 0 02 cee eeeeeee 250 P0937235 02 1 27 Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 interface harmonized standards o 005 ces cdGus cases cds aww ee 5 Basic Business Communications Manager base unit specifications 37 Module Power and Status LED states 00 0000050 54 Trunk media bay modules 00 0 cece eee ee 56 DTM LEDTUACHONS acccccccdavccsaeeeeteseriaadevasaeaaanw a 57 Slaton Module geeta aded CSeae oehe Sean ddpee dodanie sd atin nen 60 Specialized ON siii Sear arte detect cede E acacia G4 aaa e ao aos 63 Determining trunk module requirements 200 eee eee 72 Station media bay modules required 0 000 eee eee Ta Matching modules to DS30 channel capacity 78 Possible media bay module DIP switch s
124. ching the wall mounting bracket to the expansion unit 91 Figure 35 DS256 connector on the expansion unit 0000e eee 92 Figure 36 Business Communications Manager base unit DS258 connector 93 Figure 37 Assigning the modules in a hierarchal order 0 00000 97 Figure 38 How to use the configuration map 0 98 Figure 39 Switches on the media bay module 0000 eee eeaee 100 Figure 40 Overview of installing a media bay module 115 Installation and Maintenance Guide 24 Figures Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Removing the front bezel 22 22 60 cere cece aes edeea dese cen eee y 117 Identifying the media bay module latches 117 Overview of module replacement process n nuunuu nnana 119 LEDs confirm that base unit is active auaa aaua aaaea aaa 123 Module power and status LEDS aa saaana anaana aaan 124 Locating the data cards on the base unit nananana ananena 126 Sara PIO aaar erinra AE AA EA AR
125. cles e 4ring cycles 4ring cycles 4ring cycles e 5ring cycles 5ring cycles 5ring cycles e 6ring cycles e 6ring cycles e 6ring cycles e 12ringcycles e 12 ring cycles e 12 ring cycles Dialling Plan market dependent market dependent market dependent defined in defined in defined in application application but application but but controlled by market controlled by controlled by market profile ID market profile ID profile ID ONN Blocking VSC for analog n a n a 141 tone VSC for analog n a n a 141 pulse VSC for BRI n a n a 141 VSC for PRI n a n a 141 State for BRI PRI n a n a send feature code Default CO lines 2 2 4 UTAM enabled disabled disabled Portable credits 0 defined in the n a application max Release reason Release text none none detail Release code disabled disabled disabled Display duration 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec Overlap Receiving disabled enabled disabled Local Number length for 8 8 8 P0937235 02 1 System Region Attributes 267 Table 61 Region defaults Continued Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom Tandem alerting disabled disabled disabled TON NPI national E 164 national E 164 unknown unknown National number length 10 10 0 national number prepend n a n a 0 Provide tone on PRI enabled n a disabled Installation and Maintenance Guide 268 System Region Attributes P0937235 02 1 269 Appendix B Media Bay Mod
126. ctions about how to set the transmission parameters refer to the terminal or terminal emulation program documentation The Business Communications Manager system supports carriage return P0937235 02 1 Chapter 9 Starting the System 133 Finding the Configuration Menus To carry out this procedure the Business Communications Manager base unit must be correctly powered up as described in Chapter 9 Starting the System on page 121 1 Attach the null modem cable to the serial port on the Business Communications Manager base unit Note The location of the transmit TX and receive RX pins on your terminal can vary Refer to your terminal or computer documentation to confirm pin locations Attach the other end of the cable to the serial port on the terminal or computer Ensure that the Business Communications Manager base unit and your terminal or computer are turned on If you are using a computer start your VT100 terminal program Press lt ENTER gt When prompted for a User ID type ee_admin lt ENTER gt When prompted for a Domain press lt ENTER gt When prompted for a Password type eedge lt ENTER gt The Main Menu screen appears Refer to Figure 48 Figure 48 Main Menu Main Menu Initialization Menu System Configuration Configuration Wizard Media Services Card System ID Command line Reboot the system Diagnostics SSM Test Exit BCM ID 2 5 Version 6 8 3 Current Profile
127. d 1 D channel at 1 544 MBps in Europe 30 B channels and 2 D channels at 2 048 Mbps This is the module that controls system timing These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are auto answer trunks by default These lines provide a fast accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving data images text and voice information using PRI lines allows for faster transmission speeds and the addition of a variety of powerful business applications including remote LAN access video conferencing file transfer and internet access BRI ISDN loop that provides both T S and U2 and U4 region specific reference point loops These loops can support both network T and S loops and terminal equipment S loop connections This type of line provides incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network ETSI ISDN BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN service BRI provides two bearer B channels operating at 64 kbits s and a data D channel which operates at 16 kbits s The D channel is used primarily to carry call information Like loop start trunks BRI lines can be configured as manual answer or auto answer DASS2 British Trunk provides multi line IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network DPNSS international term Q Sig or Q 931 a digital private network signaling system which allows phone systems from different manufacturers to be tied together
128. d States you must enter a UTAM keycode before you Register Companion sets register the handsets Installation and Maintenance Guide 156 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Note Companion wireless availability is region specific Refer to Mobility services by region on page 259 This option also requires a software keycode for activation Companion Components Business Communications Manager Companion has four main components Software Companion software manages the telephone traffic between Companion base stations and portable telephones Base stations connect to Business Communications Manager in the same way that Business Communications Manager sets do You register the Companion portable telephones on the system They do not require any ports on the system You can connect a maximum of 60 portable telephones and a maximum of 32 base stations 32 cells to the system channel 7 This limits you to a maximum of 16 base stations which can support a maximum of 30 handsets Note If you choose a 3 5 channel split for your system you cannot assign a module to gt Companion base stations Position the base stations around the coverage area to send and receive calls between the portable telephones and Business Communications Manager Base stations use digital radio technology and support handoff and roaming within the coverage area The coverage area can be a maximum of
129. d either one RPI 8 BIX UL or two RPI 16 BIX UL power supply units PSUs The maximum input power consumption of an RPI is 240 W If you use a UPS 48 V dc backup source the maximum input power requirement of the RPI is 140 W You can upgrade an RPI 8 BIX UL to an RPI 16 BIX UL by installing a second PSU to the RPI 8 BIX UL If you distribute the RPIs around the site the number and type of RPIs depend on where you place and how you power the base stations To determine how many base stations and how many PSUs you need for the number of base stations use the following table Table 37 RPI Requirements 1 8 1 RPI 8 1 PSU 9 16 1 RPI 16 2 PSUs 17 24 1 RPI 16 and 1 RPI 8 3 PSUs 25 32 2 RPI 16 4 PSUs Mounting the RPI Unit When you mount the RPI unit ensure you follow these guidelines e To provide acceptable ventilation and to prevent overheating leave a clearance of a minimum of 125 mm 5 in around the RPI e Ifyou are installing two RPIs one above the other leave a clearance of a minimum of 300 mm 12 in between them to provide acceptable ventilation and to prevent overheating e Install RPIs a minimum of 300 mm 12 in from the ceiling P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 159 This procedure explains how to mount the RPI unit 1 Partially screw in two 10 50 mm 2 in screws using the dimensions shown in Figure 58 Figure 58 RPI m
130. d receives signals between the Business Communications Manager system and portable handsets You install the base stations on walls or ceilings Each base station provides radio coverage for a maximum of 32 cells Note Companion systems installed in the United States require a keycode to activate the base stations Refer to The Companion Wireless System on page 155 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware 67 C3050 portable handset The C3050 CT2 Plus portable handset is available in Canada only The Etiquette C3050 portable handset is available in the USA only You can assign the C3050 Portable Handset a separate telephone number or the same telephone number as a desktop telephone The C3050 supports basic features such as call forward call transfer conferencing and visual message waiting indication Remote power interconnect RPI Unit The RPI provides remote power for base station support There are two types of RPIs RPI 8 that supports a maximum of eight base stations and RPI 16 that supports a maximum of 16 base stations DECT System Components The DECT system allows the user to access calls and call features while away from their stationary telephone The following components combine with the DECT media bay module to provide this service Radio base station provides the radio link between the Business Communications Manager through the DECT module to the portable handsets Portable handsets
131. de them in your calculations Table 9 Station media bay modules required ee a DSM32 DSM 16 ASM8 Installation and Maintenance Guide 74 Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System 2 Use the number of extensions and the number of extensions per module to determine how many modules you need For example e If you require 12 digital extensions you need one DSM 16 e If you require 24 digital extensions you need one DSM 32 Note If you require only a few analog extensions you can use a Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to connect these devices to your DSM 16 DSM 32 or the DSM connector on a 4X16 module Each analog extension requires a Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Tip The Business Communications Manager base unit can hold three media bay modules If you require more you also need an Business Communications Manager expansion unit Upgrading from an Existing Norstar System A special media bay module allows you to convert existing Norstar expansion modules from the Norstar ICS to full Business Communications Manager capability The FEM allows you to connect a maximum of six Norstar expansion modules to a Business Communications Manager base unit Each expansion module connection requires one DS30 channel therefore the Business Communications Manager used for this purpose can only support one FEM module if you are converting a full
132. e Table 55 Mobility services by region Profile Available Mobility Service Caribbean Companion CT2 Plus Etiquette North American PRC CALA Companion CT2 Plus Hong Kong Companion CT2 Plus Etiquette Taiwan DECT Australia DECT Denmark France Germany Global Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom Media Bay Module Availability by Region Some of the media bay modules are customized for a specific type of line and are not available to all regions Table 56 lists a cross reference between regions and the type of modules that can be used within the related area Table 56 Module availability by profile Region DSM16 DSM32 ASM CTM CTM8 4X16 BRI DTM DECT Australia v v v v v Caribbean v y v v y v CALA v v v v v v Denmark v y v v v France v s v v y Germany v v v s v Global v v v v y v v Holland v v v v v Hong Kong v v v v s v v Installation and Maintenance Guide 260 System Region Attributes Table 56 Module availability by profile Continued Region DSM16 DSM32 gt n CTM CTM8 4X16 w a oO S DECT Italy v North American v Norway S PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom lt E S ie S i S ee lt E S i Sie S ie S lt E S i S ie S ee S lt En S ie Se S eS l
133. e connected to exposed plant e BRIM Interface e TCM extensions e external music sources MSCX e auxiliary ringer AUX e paging system relay PAGE e serial port e LAN interface The following interfaces are classified as Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV circuits and shall NOT be connected to exposed plant e ATAI Limited Warranty Nortel Networks warrants this product against defects and malfunctions during a one 1 year period from the date of original purchase If there is a defect or malfunction Nortel Networks shall at its option and as the exclusive remedy either repair or replace the telephone set at no charge if returned within the warranty period If replacement parts are used in making repairs these parts may be refurbished or may contain refurbished materials If it is necessary to replace the telephone set it may be replaced with a refurbished telephone of the same design and color If it should become necessary to repair or replace a defective or malfunctioning telephone set under this warranty the provisions of this warranty shall apply to the repaired or replaced telephone set until the expiration of ninety 90 days from the date of pick up or the date of shipment to you of the repaired or replacement set or until the end of the original warranty period whichever is later Proof of the original purchase date is to be provided with all telephone sets returned for warranty repairs Exclusions N
134. e DSM 16 module configure the DSM32 module for DS30 channel 6 because the second set of DNs cannot be accessed If you need more DNs for Companion sets use the range that starts at 597 ISDN or DECT and change the DN type to NA Portable Installation and Maintenance Guide 112 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings Media Bay Modules with Special Settings The following section describes the modules with characteristics that do not fit into the basic model DECT Switch Settings The DECT module supports a maximum of eight DECT radio base station connections This module occupies one full DS30 channel which can support a maximum of 32 cordless handsets when all eight base stations are deployed For detailed instructions about using the DECT module refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Table 22 shows the settings for each DS30 channel and the assigned dialing numbers DNs Table 22 DECT module settings Set the switches Use these Select Select Use these DNs on DS30 DNs on 2 5 Custom DN range offset 4 2 3 4 5 6 updated 2 0 channel system system 2 o jor jon jon yon yon 0n 97 624 501 532 3 o jo yom pom yon ee lor 597 624 501 532 4 o 0 ie fon on 597 624 501 532 5 Go eal a lor for 597 624 501 532 6 o 0 0 ihe fon on jon 597 624 501 532
135. e appropriate mounting brackets Mounting brackets cannot support multiple units Refer to Environment Checklist on page 79 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the Business Communications Manager base unit Attaching the Rack Mounting Brackets 1 Place the Business Communications Manager base unit on a table 2 Align the screw holes between the base unit and the right rack mounting bracket 3 Fasten the bracket to the base unit using four screws Caution Only use the screws supplied with the rack mounting bracket Do not replace screws Other screws can damage the Business Communications Manager base unit 4 Align the screw holes between the base unit and the left rack mounting bracket 5 Fasten the bracket to the base unit using four screws Refer to Figure 28 Figure 28 Attaching the rack mounting bracket to the base unit O OO O000 OQ Installation and Maintenance Guide 84 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit Installing the Base Unit into the Rack After the brackets are installed perform the following steps to install the Business Communications Manager base unit in the equipment rack Determine the location in the rack you want to install the base unit Position the base unit in the rack Align the holes in the rack mounting bracket with the holes in the equipment rack rails b amp b WO N a
136. e base unit using the two screws inserted into the top and bottom holes Refer to Figure 116 Figure 116 Attach the redundant power supply housing Power supply housing screws 5 Insert the power supply bracket and secure it with a screw Refer to Figure 117 Figure 117 Securing the power supply bracket Installation and Maintenance Guide 234 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply Oo If you have not already done so install a redundant fan into the unit Refer to Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan on page 217 7 Inside the cabinet reconnect the power supply and fan cables 8 Reconnect the power supply and fan cables 9 Replace the cover 10 Ensure that you position the power modules correctly before inserting them into the power supply housing a The green LED sits at the top of the unit b Check the rocker switch on the left side of the module and ensure that it is in the OFF position 11 Insert the power modules into the redundant power supply housing at the back of the server a The face of the module is flush with the casing You hear a click when it is properly seated b Secure each module with a screw through the tab on the right side of the module These holes align with the middle two holes on the right of the power supply housing Refer to Figure 118 Figure 118 Insert and attach the modules Module screws N Power
137. e instructions marked on the product Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the product This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register This product should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product but have it sent to a qualified service person when some service or repair work is required Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions a When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed b Ifthe product has been exposed to rain water or liquid has been spilled on the product disconnect and allow the product to dry out to see if it still operates but do not open up the product
138. e less than 100 mm in diameter Place the fiber cable spool into a slot at the back of the cable trough Note If you enable all six jacks of the FEM module the FEM module is the only module you can install on your Business Communications Manager system because each port requires one DS30 channel Refer to FEM Switch Settings on page 113 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules 145 Connecting the Fiber Cables Follow these steps to connect your Norstar expansion modules to a FEM module installed into a Business Communications Manager base unit 1 Ensure the Business Communications Manager is properly restarted 2 Connect the fiber cables from the Norstar expansion modules to the jacks on the FEM module Note Which DIP switch settings you chose will determine which FEM ports are available Refer to FEM Switch Settings on page 113 a Connect the Norstar Line Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 1 b Connect Norstar Extension Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 6 3 Change the DN records in the Unified Manager or change the set wiring as required to match your system Warning When you connect a Norstar station module to an FEM the extension numbers VAN of the telephones connected to the station module change To keep the same extension numbers change the DNs of the telephones or change the telephone wiring to correspond with the required DNs Note If you connect a No
139. e position from which you removed the failed fan 4 Note Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the Business Communications Manager base unit server 4 Note Piggy backed redundant fan If you are installing or replacing a piggy back redundant fan in a 2 0 Business Communications Manager server that has been updated with a redundant power supply place the redundant fan against the existing fan Ensure that the blades are positioned in the same direction as the existing fan fan labels both face in the same direction Use the four screws and nuts that are supplied with the redundant fan to attach the redundant fan to the existing fan Figure 105 Installing piggy backed fans Note Side by side redundant fan If you are installing a second fan in a 2 5 model Business Communications Manager server you must remove the cover label on the back of the server to expose the fan air holes and mounting holes 2 Align the screw holes in the fan with the screw holes on the server 3 Attach the fan to the Business Communications Manager base unit using the four screws 2 0 hardware or plastic rivets 2 5 hardware Refer to Figure 104 on page 221 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan 223 4 Connect the power supply cables for each fan to the SSM board Refer to Figure 102 on page 220 Note Piggy backed redundant fan gt Co
140. e two radio based systems that can be added to the Business Communications Manager system to provide mobile communications Both systems require radio equipped base stations connected to specific types of media bay modules installed in the Business Communications Manager e The Companion requires a DSM module for the base stations to plug into Refer to The Companion Wireless System on page 155 e DECT provides virtual BRI loops within the DECT module Refer to Installing DECT systems on page 181 The Companion Wireless System Your Companion portable telephone allows you to leave your desk without missing important telephone calls The portable telephones can access most Business Communications Manager business features such as call forward call transfer voice conference and voice messaging using feature codes Figure 56 provides an overview of the process for installing a Companion wireless system onto the Business Communications Manager system Figure 56 Overview of installing a Companion system Business Communications Manager Companion equipment DSM module Install external installed and antennas and configured lightning protection if required Restore system to operation Install remote power interconnect RPI Configure DN i records for the Install base stations handsets Connect base stations to DSM In the Unite
141. e way as those on the other media bay modules On the FEM the switches turn the fiber ports on and off For information about setting the switches on an FEM refer to FEM Switch Settings on page 113 Start from the list of modules you chose in Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System on page 71 After you determine which modules channels you want to use and how much DS30 channel capacity each module requires you determine the location of the modules on the DS30 array From that information you choose switch settings for each module These settings are then set on the module DIP switches This chapter describes the latter process of positioning your modules in the DS30 hierarchy and determining and setting the DIP switch settings on the module Rules for Assigning DS30 Channel Hierarchy Media bay modules are assigned to DS30 channels in a specific hierarchical manner This section describes the preferred order of positioning for each type of module Notes About Assigning Modules The following are some general notes about assigning modules e If you chose a 3 5 channel split for your system DS30 channel 7 cannot be used by any module For modules that require two channels this means that you cannot set the DIP switches to channel 6 for those modules because the second level of lines would fall into channel 7 and would not be accessible Refer to Figure 37 on page 97 Refer to Understanding DS30 Ch
142. ed Kingdom region except there are no default dialing restrictions and ATA parameters are set to European values P0937235 02 1 System Region Attributes 265 Table 61 Region defaults Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom Direct Dial Access code 0 0 0 DTMF parameters Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec Pause time 1 5 1 5 3 5 Interdigit time 80 msec 80 msec 100 msec Conference tone disabled disabled enabled Call Back Kill time 180 sec 180 sec 360 sec PCM Companding Law mu law a law EBI a law EBI Race Integration disabled disabled disabled OLI digits fixed 10 digits fixed 10 digits variable length a maximum of 8 Dial Tone Detection enabled enabled enabled Hunt Groups Show in second disabled disabled disabled Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy busy tone busy tone busy tone Mode broadcast broadcast sequential Target line if busy setting prime prime busy tone M7000 set disabled enabled enabled Fax switch enabled enabled enabled Service Schedule time Night start 23 00 start 23 00 start 23 00 end 07 00 end 07 00 end 07 00 Evening start 17 00 start 17 00 start 17 00 end 23 00 end 23 00 end 23 00 Lunch start 12 00 start 12 00 start 12 00 end 13 00 end 13 00 end 13 00 Service 4 start 00 00 start 00 00 start 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 end 00 00 Service 5 start 00 00
143. ed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections central office lines removed first Enhanced 911 Configuration Caution Warning Local state and federal requirements for Emergency 911 services support by Customer Premises Equipment vary Consult your telecommunication service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations Note For information about 911 configuration refer to the Enhanced 911 E911 Configuration section in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide Radio frequency Interference A Warning Equipment generates RF energy This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If not installed and used in accordance with the installation manual it may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with ICES 003 CLASS A Canadian EMI Requirements Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Installation and Maintenance Guide Telecommunication Registration Business Communications Manager equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry Can
144. ede aweraws 253 Determining the Status of a Telephone 0 00 cece eee 253 Replacing Telephones with Different Models 00000 eee eeee 254 Status of the Replaced Telephone 00 cece eee eee ees 254 Appendix A System Region Attributes 200 e eee eee 255 Core Software and Regions 24 a00cesb seem ese td ee ae see wedeceae dene 255 SM ee AEEA EEE a ek dennis ay dk Ded dep ds dome cores echoes ET 256 Caller ID Displays ccccarce cage castadeeae Le eadbareeeeartaweaeeand de 257 Companding Law by Region 00 c cece eee ee 257 ISOM LING SENOR drra aaa ee aadA 257 Mobility Services by Region rere seen descended ed ged cdeeda isdie dee dee Es 259 Media Bay Module Availability by Region 0 c eee eee 259 Trunk Availability by REGION cnccccde caked chGdedeked ede sasaedaeeedvieases 260 BRIL and PRI line Tee nas ccas og dae ath ade e Rime sidari tim dmg tit 262 Defining Time Zones by Country and Language 2 0000ee eee eae 264 System Dealg 2 veceieeeedebes bese ehee as dhes Ea dee EEE Rees PERE EER ee 264 Lt gd ERE La REMY ee Kade oad hehe eda Meee ee hee ey eee heed 267 Appendix B Media Bay Module Combinations 00 200s eee eee eens 269 Combine C TMs and AXT OS ick oeeahreneaedgecnnnadbeceiekeeaaecierec 269 Fuly naded Sth rataa aaa aa a a a a kehee 270 DECT COMING acca nih wet da dk nite ade a acd ch il A ee ada on 271 Changing CONMGUI
145. ee oe wee eed dee ew 83 Attaching the Rack Mounting Brackets 0 c cee eee eee 83 Installing the Base Unit into the Rack 000 cece eeeee 84 Installing the Base Unit on the Wall 60044ek sc eke eee eke dee Ode ewe 84 Installing the Base Unit on a Flat Surface 0 0 0 0 0 cnn 87 Chapter 6 Installing the Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit 89 Installing the Expansion Unit into a Rack 00 0c eee eee 89 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Expansion Unit 89 Attaching the Expansion Unit to the Rack 0000 cee eeeee 90 Installing the Expansion Unit on the Wall 000 00 cece eee es 91 Installing the Expansion Unit on a Flat Surface 0 0 0 00 ccc ees 92 Connecting the Expansion Unit to the Base Unit 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee 92 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 00 cece eee eee eee eee 95 Rules for Assigning DS30 Channel Hierarchy 0 0000 cc cee cece eee 95 Notes About Assigning Modules 0 00 cece ees 95 Installation and Maintenance Guide 18 Contents Determining Module DIP Switch Settings 0c eee eee 98 Line and Extension Numbers for Specific Modules 00000eeeee 101 DIM Switch SQUNGE 6 2aia cided apdedddeedhars AEEA SER O 101 BRI Switeh SOUINGS etr anrarsiarnn ranra dees AEA aap A Ea ames 103 CTENI GERNE SS aaia a dae G a a E EA Soe eee RARA 104
146. eed 10 m 33 ft gt Installation and Maintenance Guide 178 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Installing an Outdoor Omnidirectional Antenna Canada When installing an outdoor omnidirectional external antenna ensure you follow these guidelines e Locate the antenna on the external wall of the building Note You must install the antenna on a vertical surface gt e Keep the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna as close as possible to the base station The base station itself must always be located inside the building e The recommended installation height is 4 m 13 ft to 5 m 16 5 ft above ground level e Always install a surge protector between an outdoor omnidirectional external antenna and a base station Note The connector on the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna is a TNC female connector To connect the antenna you need an adapter to connect the TNC connector to the BNC coaxial cables or a coaxial cable with a TNC male connector on one end and BNC male connector on the other end Caution Fit lightning protection to the antenna if appropriate See Installing a Lightning Surge Protector Canada on page 180 for more information Important points to remember e Do not install the external antenna or the lightning surge protector during an electrical storm e Always turn off the base station power before connecting the coaxial cable of an outd
147. el Double click the Network icon Select your TCP IP adapter and then click the Properties button Click the IP Address tab Click the Specify an IP address option In the IP Address field enter 10 10 10 2 In the Subnet Mask field enter 255 255 255 0 Click OK Click OK 0 Click Yes to restart the PC Connecting the Ethernet Crossover Cable After you configure the computer connect the computer to the Business Communications Manager base unit in the following manner 1 2 oa Ff O Shut down the computer Attach one end of the Ethernet crossover cable to the LAN card on the Business Communications Manager base unit Connect the other end of the cable to the network interface card on your computer Start the computer Log on to the Unified Manager using the default IP address Use the Quick Start Wizard to create the system configuration Refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide for details about using the wizard The Programming Operations Guide provides a detailed record about the information that you require to configure basic system programming Warning If you change this information on an existing system the telephony programming is erased and the telephony system is disabled for a period of time The Business Communications Manager also performs a cold start Installation and Maintenance Guide 136 Chapter 9 Starting the System Entering the software keycod
148. el offset set to O offset set to 0 1 or 2 2 DS30 Channels 7 ASM8s offset set to 0 1 2 or 3 1 DTM max of per DS30 2 per DS30 channel channel 4X16 1 offset of 7 7_ 1 DS30 channel 1 DS30 Channel nie if a __ 3 BRIs offset set to for telephone per DS30 and equipment channel 1 DSM 16 connections per DS30 channel 1 DS30 Channel 7 1 DS30 Channel offset set to 0 1 2 or 3 offset set to 0 4 CTMs 2 DS30 Channels per DS30 offset set to 0 1 DECT channel _per DS30 L_ 1 DSM 32 channel E per 2 DS30 1 DECT per system channels 1 DS30 Channel offset set to 0 1 or 2 Note The FEM module requires a p E DS30 channel for each port that is max o active If all ports are active 2 offsets no other modules can be added to j per DS30 the system channel a Note If you Choose a CTM8 or a 4X16 module there are some restrictions about the offsets you can choose Refer to the DIP switch settings in CTM Switch Settings on page 104 and 4X16 Switch Settings on page 108 for details Installation and Maintenance Guide 78 Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System 1 Make a list of modules and the space requirements for each module you chose Refer to Table 10 Table 10 Matching modules to DS30 channel capacity Channel split 2 6 default 3 5 extra IP lines 2 Set the channel numbers and offsets on the DIP switche
149. emoving the cover 205 removing the front bezel 117 replacing memory 244 247 replacing the hard disk 209 restart 206 securing the power supply 229 base ynut inserting LAN card 242 basic rate interface module 39 battery clock removing 250 installing 251 battery feed voltage 183 baud rate 190 BNC connector 171 174 180 bracket hard disk 212 power supply 232 P0937235 02 1 Index 293 bracket screw power supply 231 bracket terminal board 168 BRI DECT module settings 112 description 39 DIP switch settings 99 103 DS30 channel requirements 77 line types 262 network standards 5 wiring 139 wiring chart 140 BRIM S T 59 browser requirements 69 BS 1 download 170 bus numbers DS30 channel hierarchy 95 Business Communications Manager 4X16 60 4X16 combination module 61 ASM analog station module 62 Attendant Console requires keycode 45 base unit LEDs 44 base unit overview 36 BRIM S T ISDN trunk module 59 cable between 80 Call Center requires keycode 46 Call Detail Recording 46 checking the power 122 component diagram 37 38 connection points 43 CTM CTM8 Caller ID analog line 58 data networking components 40 DECT system components 67 DPNSS networking 45 DSM 16 and DSM 32 digital station module 60 DTM digital trunk module 57 expansion unit overview 40 Fax Mail application 46 hard disk install 212 hard disk space 36 hardware components 36 12050 soft phone 47 LAN CTE requires keycode medi
150. enance Guide 294 Index installing 148 M7324 65 North America only 66 SAPS cable 66 CAPN module M7324N 65 Caution symbol 29 cells Companion 66 Central America supported languages 256 Central Answering Position see CAP and CAPN channel service unit see CSU channel split Companion 96 156 channel splits 75 chassis ground 127 129 CLCI CIR frame relay 130 clear to send 127 128 129 132 clearances Companion base station 168 CLID 4X16 module 39 CTM module 39 clock battery installing 251 removing 250 coaxial cable 171 175 180 coin cell battery 3v Maxell CR2032 249 companding laws by region 257 Companion administration maintenance tools 156 base station 66 156 167 169 base station authorization software 45 base station positioning 167 C3050 CT2Plus 156 C3050 Etiquette 156 C3060 156 channel split limitations 96 156 coverage area maximum 156 diagnostic software 156 DS30 channels 96 equipment supported 82 Etiquette C3050 CT2 67 external antenna 171 178 indoor antenna 176 177 install base station 168 installation process overview 51 lightning surge arrestor 171 173 lightning surge arrestor install 180 minimum distance base station 167 portable telephone registration 170 powering up base station 170 register handset 170 RPI 157 software 45 156 supporting regions 259 UTAM approval 167 UTAM messages 170 Companion 3020 156 Companion Base Station see base station components hard
151. ent This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See installation instructions for details e Use only an FCC Part 68 compliant Universal Service Order Code USOC network interface jack as specified in the installation instructions to connect this telephone to the telephone line To connect the phone press the small plastic tab on the plug at the end of the phone s line cord Insert into a wall or baseboard jack until it clicks To disconnect press the tab and pull out See installation instructions for details Installation and Maintenance Guide e Ifthe terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of the product may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary e If anetwork interface jack is not already installed in your location you can order one from your telephone company Order the appropriate USOC Network interface jack as specified in the installation instructions for wall mounted telephones or for desk table use In some states customers are permitted to install their own jacks e Your telephone may not be connected to a party line or coin telephone line Connectio
152. entral American countries Table 51 South Central America language breakout Language Spanish English French Country Dominican Republic Peru St Thomas Suyana Haiti Jamaica Panama USVI T Puerto Rico Uruguay Aruba St Kitts Argentina Venezuela Bahamas St acid Bolivia El Salvador Bermuda 5 St Maarten Chile Honduras Curacao Suri ae uriname Columbia Ecuador Trinidad NIS O C Costa Rica Paraguay Anguilla St Vincent Guatemala Antigua St Thomas Mexico Barbados Gavmaniciands Nicaragua Dominica Sie Grenada P0937235 02 1 System Region Attributes 257 Caller ID Displays The North American region supports the following format 5554775 613 All other regions display the numbers in a continuous string of a maximum of 14 characters 6135554775 Companding Law by Region Table 52 shows the companding law used for each region Table 52 Companding law Companding Law u law A law Caribbean Australia Hong Kong CALA North American Denmark Taiwan France Germany Global Holland Italy Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom ISDN Line Services Table 53 shows the ISDN private network services that are supported by the Business Communications Manager Table 54 shows the network based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each Table 53 ISDN line services MCDN over PRI SL 1 DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG Bas
153. ephone A single line telephone that becomes active when there is no power to the Business Communications Manager This telephone is also referred to as a 500 2500 telephone Ethernet A local area network that networks computers with coaxial cable or twisted pair wiring This protocol makes use of Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect CSMA CD LAN to allow computers such as the Business Communications Manager to listen for pauses before they communicate event message These are messages generated by the system to record activity The messages are written to the system log external call A call to or from a destination outside the Business Communications Manager system Installation and Maintenance Guide 280 Glossary external line A line assigned to a telephone that allows calls to the PSTN external paging A feature that allows voice announcements over an externally installed loudspeaker connected to the Business Communications Manager The external speaker is not an Business Communications Manager component FAX FAX works with Business Communications Manager Voice Messaging FAX allows a caller to send a fax document to a voice mailbox feature code A unique code used to access Business Communications Manager features and options on the telephones filtering Filtering is the process of examining a data packet on the network to determine the destination of the data and whether the packet gets p
154. es If you have purchased any of the optional Business Communications Manager applications that require keycode activation refer to Business Communications Manager 2 5 Software Keycode Installation Guide for information about how obtain the keycodes and how to enter them into the Unified Manager These codes can be entered after basic system configuration is complete P0937235 02 1 137 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules This chapter describes how to wire the cables that connect to the station and trunk modules e Station modules require 25 pair wired cables to connect the modules to the equipment in the telephone room where your telco demarcation point is located Use a qualified technical professional to ensure the cable wiring and your interior telephone wiring are correct e Trunk modules DECT base stations and FEM cables are connected using RJ type jacks These cables can be supplied by qualified technical personnel to ensure the correct pin out AN Warning Use only qualified persons to service the system The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the appropriate training and experience Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage Warning Leakage currents Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents
155. es PCI Device Temperature Fan PCI Devices PCI Device PCI Device These LEDs monitor e power O e disk drive fF e system status e five PCI power indicators Note These LEDs correspond to the cards not to the PCI slots For example a WAN card uses only one PCI slot but has the capacity for two connections In this case both LEDs stay lit as long as a WAN card is present e temperature p e fans amp The LED states are described in Table 25 on page 124 The Unified Manager contains a monitoring tool that allows you to determine the current condition of the LEDs from your computer Refer to Using the System Status Monitor to Monitor LEDs on page 198 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 45 System Options The Business Communications Manager system provides a number of software applications that enhance basic functionality Some of these applications work immediately after you install the Business Communications Manager system this is considered core software Other applications are enabled when you enter software keycodes which you generate when you buy one of these applications Refer to the Business Communications Manager Software Keycode Installation Guide for specific directions for entering a code Telephony Features and Options The telephony features and options have individual installation and features guides This section lists the
156. es from the system before disconnecting the power cord from an earthed System startup You must reconnect the power cords to an earthed outlet before reconnecting the cables to the media bay modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 122 Chapter 9 Starting the System Checking Power and Wiring The Business Communications Manager system is a global product Therefore you must ensure that the power supply is correct for your location e 2 0 hardware has a standard power supply which requires manual adjustment for the voltage by setting a switch located on the face of the power supply e 2 5 systems have standard power supplies and redundant power supplies which adjust automatically to the required voltage Follow this procedure to check the voltage and wiring and power up the system 1 Check all wiring before connecting power to the Business Communications Manager units i Warning Connecting power Always connect power to the base and expansion units before you reconnect the cabling to the front of the units 2 Connect the Business Communications Manager base unit power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non switchable third wire ground ac outlet If you use a power bar plug the power cords into the power bar and connect the power bar to the ac outlet 3 Connect the Business Communications Manager expansion unit power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non switchable third wire ground ac outlet
157. ettings 99 DIM switch setings TT ea odie Salad ead dela dian ce Ree Seamed 101 DTM switch settings North American PRI 000005 101 DTM switch settings E1 and UK PRI 0205 102 BARI Site Sous acca nna dasccdcneeeasee dur seansasaases Ohs4 103 CTM Switch SOHINGS 2 0 cere cd cies aren distereanders tare canes 104 CT DR SUNT SENEE oo tein iia as iida te aioe aa a Dee kil sien A a 106 PS e erT dicen AET EES AT TTS 108 ASM 8 switch settings i csisirriirsatediseiirirt eee 109 DSM 16 and DSM 32 switch settings nanana aaaea 111 DECT module setings lt i ncccedecaceerctetaanewadannegwnn thas 112 FEM wilen SONOS aas rairitere eya eiaa cee hase aie a 113 Business Communications Manager base unit LED states 123 Module power and status LED states ananuna aaan 124 DB25 adapter cable os ices tems eee es a dee E 127 RS 422 ElA 530 adapter cable 0 0 00 cece eee 128 V35 Adapter Gable ci cce ceca andeietidaae dee rie eee bade canes 129 DB15 X 21 adapter Cable a aig cca a dna mad duna d wes awed mae 129 Senal port PNO wuvcce deewcneede dees eee depend Fes been ve ds 132 DOM Wg Chal edera a edee A IEAA 142 ASM WINN CHAE ccackcdenndncd ir istai SARER aaece ISERE 143 Extension comparison Chari cccccccccvetevctensetiaterene nem 145 Cross referencing ports and DNS 000 cece eee 148 Peena Do erderia E 150 NOS DNO gala Kad trota ARE OAE ee hehe TO 153 RPI Rogureme
158. evel guarantee the transmission rates error rates and other data transmission characteristics QoS is critical for the continuous and real time transmission of video and multimedia information Q reference point signalling QSIG QSIG is an ETSI standard signalling for multi vendor peer to peer communications between PBXs and or central offices This is an International standard and not available in North America Random Access Memory RAM Computer memory that stores data temporarily RAM stores the data used by the microprocessor because it executes instructions The contents of RAM are erased when you restart or turn off the Business Communications Manager Remote access The ability to dial into an Business Communications Manager system from outside the system and use selected features The Class of Service determines which lines features and dialing capabilities are available Restriction filter Restriction filters prevent selected telephone numbers or feature codes from being dialed Restriction filters can be applied to lines sets specific lines on a set and to Class of Service passwords Read Only Memory ROM Memory that stores data permanently ROM contains instructions that the Business Communications Manager needs to operate The instructions stored in ROM are used by the Business Communications Manager each time it is turned on or restarted Router A device that forwards traffic between networks based on net
159. f installation of additional hardware and or servicing is required disconnect all telephone cable connections prior to unplugging the Business Communications Manager Ensure the switch located on the back of the PC on the power supply is set to the correct input voltage 115 or 230 Ensure the Business Communications Manager and Business Communications Manager expansion cabinet are plugged into the wall socket using a three prong power cable before any telephone cables are connected P0937235 02 1 Caution Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and remov
160. f you do not have a network connection you can also access a Quick Start Wizard through a serial link For detailed information about configuring the Business Communications Manager system refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide Using a Null Modem Serial Cable You must use a null modem cable connection to the Business Communications Manager base unit if the default IP address is not compatible with your LAN or WAN network Required equipment e null modem cable e VT100 compatible terminal or a computer that has a terminal program such as Hyperterminal Warning Your terminal must be VT100 compatible and must support the VT100 National Character set If the terminal does not support the National Character set the text displays incorrectly Installation and Maintenance Guide 132 Chapter 9 Starting the System Setting Up the Null Modem Cable Table 30 shows the correct wiring for the Business Communications Manager serial port of the null modem cable Table 30 Serial port pinout 1 Data Carrier Detect DCD 6 Data Set Ready DSR i oe aes 2 Serial data in RX 7 Request to Send RTS 3 Serial data out TX 8 Clear to Send CTS 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR 9 Ring Indicator RI 6789 5 Ground required connections Transmission parameters 9600 bits per second 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit hardware flow control Note For instru
161. formed by an authorized supplier Canadian Regulations please read carefully Notice The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal EquipmentTechnical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the P0937235 02 1 7 telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should co
162. fset is 0 step 4 Set the DIP switches on the module to match the DIP switch settings indicated for that offset step 5 Table 12 Possible media bay module DIP switch settings Media bay module positioning DIP switch settings DS30 DSM DSM 4x16 ASM8 16 32 Offsets 23 4 5 6 Offsets Offsets 0 1 2 3 Offsets offset DS30 ch 0 0 channel Line Exten 0 1 2 on on on on on on on on on on on on on on supported 0 2 3 EA Ea ee ES Zon aa Ea EA ET En on off off off on off Module set to offset 0 Module set to offset 1 E Module set to offset 2 E Module set to offset 3 Each shaded square represents the amount of the DS30 channel and the offset which the module requires lf your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split DS30 channel 7 is not available to media bay modules Installation and Maintenance Guide 100 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 2 Turn the media bay module upside down and locate the DIP switches Figure 39 Switches on the media bay module Underside of the amp amp media bay module s ae 2 654321 Off A settonn 2 a e On othe oo Y to QO sree o BELETTE Eig DIP switches Back of the media bay module 3 Set the switches to correspond with the settings you chose in step 3 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each medi
163. g parameters for anATA2 Input impedance at tip and ring 600 ohms Return loss gt 20 dB for 200 to 3 400 Hz when Network terminated with 600 ohms Insertion loss on an internal call Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager system loss 3 0 dB 0 5 dB Insertion loss on an external call Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager system loss 2 2 dB 1 0 dB Business Communications Manager system to Business Communications Manager ATA 2 loss 0 5 dB 1 0 dB The maximum loss for Business Communications Manager ATA 2 to Central Office CO configuration shown in Figure 74 must not exceed 10 dB Figure 74 Insertion Loss from the CO to the single line telephone Business Communications Manager AIA 2 Single line telephone Central Office cable loss Cable loss P Business Communications Manager to ATA 2 Ll ATA 2 to Business Communications Manager lt mm _ 10BMx gt Longitudinal balance to ground 50 dB 60 to 4 000 Hz With IEEE 455 1976 test Overload level 3 dB P0937235 02 1 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 185 Insertion Loss Measurement Measure the total insertion loss between the CO and voice messaging device by using standard dial up test lines with a transmission test set For example Hewlett Packard 4935A Transmission Test Set For CO to Analog Device Measuremen
164. ges to CallPilot mailboxes Users can use the application to send and retrieve fax messages as easily as they send and retrieve voice messages e CallPilot Message Networking Setup and Operation Guide and CallPilot Message Networking User Guide Message Networking requires keycode to add extra mailboxes links the CallPilot system with other voicemail systems and allows the exchange of voice messages between users at different sites CallPilot supports Digital networking using Voice Profile for Internet Messaging VPIM standard and Audio Messaging Interchange Specification AMIS networking e CallPilot Desktop Messaging Software Install and Maintenance Guide P0937235 02 1 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 47 Desktop Message Networking requires keycode provides a multimedia messaging application that works with an e mail client to provide a single graphical user interface CallPilot voice fax and text messages as well as e mail messages DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide region specific The DECT radio based system allows you to configure up to 32 cordless handsets that communicate through radio base stations deployed around a site The handsets can be configured as stand alone sets or they can be twinned with stationary sets IP Telephony Configuration Guide i2004 IP telephone configuration requires a combination of data and telephony settings This telephone can make calls through ei
165. gle brackets lt gt Indicates a keyboard key press or simultaneous key presses i e lt ENTER gt or lt CTRL j gt Acronyms These are the acronyms used in this document ANSI ASM AWG BIOS BPS BRI CAP CIR CLID CSMA CD American National Standards Institute Analog station module American wire gauge Basic input output system Bits per second Basic rate interface module Central answering position Committed information rate Calling line identification Carrier sense multiple access collision detect P0937235 02 1 Preface 31 CSU CTM DECT DIMM DLCI DN DNS DPNSS DRT DSM DTM DTMF FEM HTTP Hz VC IP ISDN Kbyte LAN MCDN MHz MSC NIC OPX PBX PCI PEC III PRI PSTN QoS QSIG RAM ROM SAPS Channel service unit Calling line trunk module Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications Dual in line memory module Data link connection indentifier Directory number Domain name server Digital private network signalling system Delayed ring transfer to prime Digital station module Digital Trunk media bay module Dual tone multifrequency Fiber expansion module Hypertext transfer protocol Hertz Intercom Internet protocol Integrated services digital network Kilobyte Local area network Meridian customer defined network protocol Megahertz Media services card Network interface card Off premises extension Private branch exchange Peripheral component interconnect Process
166. goff menu 3 Continue with the intructions Installation and Maintenance Guide 208 Chapter 16 Preparing Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades P0937235 02 1 209 Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard Disk The Business Communications Manager base units for the 2 5 system include one factory installed hard disk Figure 91 provides an overview of the hard disk replacement process Figure 91 Hard disk replacement overview If possible do a software shutdown Restore unit to operation Set up unit for maintenance Remove the hard disk and replace with new disk Perform disk initialization and restore Test all functions This chapter explains how to change a hard disk Warning Maintain a current backup of your system When you replace the hard disk you must restore the Business Communications Manager 2 5 system programming from the backup Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement kits Remember to take suitable precautions when working inside the Business Communications Manager 2 5 server Maintain a clean and static safe site Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the telephone and network cables and the power cord before opening the server Danger Read and follow all instructions carefully Installation and Maintenance Guide 210 Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard Disk
167. hassis Power supply cable Note Redundant fans gt If the fans are piggy backed the back fan connects directly to a power supply connector through a patch connector If the fans are side by side then both fans are connected on the SSM board Fan wires run under the power supply and are connected to J7 or J6 on the SSM board Installation and Maintenance Guide 220 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan Figure 102 Remove the fan cables from SSM board 2 5 models Dooog fooooo fooooooo 00000000 SSM board gogog o0000 jooooooo 00000000 I ff aaa THD If Fan connectors 5 Remove the snap rivets that hold the fan to the base unit Refer to Figure 103 and Figure 104 on page 221 6 Liftthe old fan out of the base unit P0937235 02 1 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan 221 Figure 103 Removing the fan 2 5 single fan model IIR 5D a 2 ee i pa 33 gs os FOR GEO gi a 7 4 as wy A Fan attachments Fan attachments Installation and Maintenance Guide 222 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan Replacing the Cooling Fan To replace the fan in the base unit follow these steps 1 Place the new fan in the Business Communications Manager base unit in th
168. he Business Communications Manager base unit power cord is 1 5 m 5 ft long You can connect the server to a power bar with a maximum length of 2 m 6 5 ft including power bar You must use a power bar approved by an appropriate National Test Body with a third wire ground Do not use an extension cord between the server and the power bar or between the power bar and the electrical outlet The cable between the Business Communications Manager expansion unit and the Business Communications Manager base unit is supplied with the expansion unit Do not use any other cables or connectors Internal Wiring Requirements This section describes the requirements for a digital loop and an analog loop within the system Digital Loop The following parameters must be met for a digital loop e one two or three twisted pair cable s per telephone e dc loop resistance of less than 64 Q e cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG less than 300 m 975 ft e use of a station auxiliary power supply SAPS for loops 300 m 975 ft to 1200 m 3900 ft In North America the SAPS must be a CSA or UL approved Class 2 power source In Europe the SAPS must be a Class II power source and CE marked e no bridge taps P0937235 02 1 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit 81 Analog Loop The following parameters must be met for an analog loop maximum dc loop resistance of 208 Q maximum cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG of 1220 m 4
169. he base unit without stress on the cable The expansion unit has the same environmental and electrical requirements as the base unit For more information about these requirements refer to Preparation Checklist on page 79 Installing the Expansion Unit into a Rack The Business Communications Manager expansion unit fits into a standard 19 inch equipment rack You must install the expansion cabinet in the same rack as the Business Communications Manager base unit Caution When installing the Business Communications Manager expansion unit in a rack do not stack units directly on top of one another Fasten each unit to the rack with the separate mounting brackets Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Expansion Unit You must install two rack brackets on the expansion unit to allow you to install the unit into the equipment rack These brackets are supplied with the expansion unit 1 Place the Business Communications Manager expansion unit on a table 2 Align the screw holes between the expansion unit and the right rack mounting bracket Refer to Figure 32 Figure 32 Attach the rack mounting bracket to the expansion unit Installation and Maintenance Guide 90 Chapter 6 Installing the Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit 3 Fasten the bracket to the expansion unit using four screws 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 on the other side with second bracket Caution Use only the screws
170. hin a relatively small geographic area mailbox A storage place for voice messages on Business Communications Manager Voice Messaging Meridian 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface This is the MCDN protocol which is used between members of the Nortel Networks Meridian family of Private Telecommunication Network Exchanges The signalling information is carried via time slot 16 of a 2 048 Mbit s digital transmission system MHz A unit of measure indicating frequency in millions of cycles per second microprocessor The Central Processing Unit CPU component that controls all activity inside the Business Communications Manager modem A communications device that allows computers to exchange data over telephone lines music source You can connect a radio or other source of music to the system to provide music for the Music on Hold and Background Music features A music source is not part of the Business Communications Manager system components Network Basic Input Output System NetBIOS An interface and upper level protocol developed by IBM for use with a proprietary adapter for its PC network product NetBIOS provides a standard interface to the lower networking layers The protocol provides higher level programs with access to the network network Two or more computers linked electronically to share programs and exchange data Installation and Maintenance Guide 284 Glossary network device A network device is a ha
171. ic Call Basic Call Basic Call Basic Call DDI DDI DDI DDI Name display Diversion Originating line identity OLI Name display Number display Redirection Terminating Line Identity TLI Number display Centralized voice mail Centralized voice mail Call Charge Indication CCl Installation and Maintenance Guide 258 System Region Attributes Table 53 ISDN line services Continued MCDN over PRI SL 1 DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG Camp on Call Offer Call Charge Rate Indication CCRD ISDN Call Connection Limit Loop avoidance Network Call Transfer Executive Intrusion Break in Three Party Trunk Route Optimization TRO Route Optimization Trunk Anti Tromboning Table 54 ISDN services by Protocol Germany Global Holland Hong Kong Italy Norway PRC Spain Kingdom Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Protocol Available ISDN services NI Basic Call Caribbean North America DID Name display Number display ONN blocking ETSI Euro Basic Call Australia CALA Denmark France DDI subaddressing on S loop ETSI Call Diversion partial rerouting AOC E specific changes for Holland and Italy MCID CLIP COLP CLIR P0937235 02 1 System Region Attributes 259 Mobility Services by Region Table 55 shows the Mobility services that are supported by the Business Communications Manager and the regions that can use each typ
172. ic Source customer supplied You can use any approved low power device as a music source This would include equipment such as a radio with a high impedance earphone jack as a music source Music on Hold Specifications Ensure that the music source follows these guidelines Nominal input impedance is 3 3 kilohms Nominal sensitivity of this interface returned to digital encoded PCM is 22 dBm0 for a 0 25 V rms input signal The input is limited so that the encoded analog content at the digital interface to the network does not exceed 12 dBm when averaged over any three second interval The maximum non clipped input level is 1 V rms The interface is protected against ringing cross Installation and Maintenance Guide 196 Chapter 14 Installing Optional Telephony Equipment Connecting the External Music Source Follow these steps to connect the external music source to the Business Communications Manager jack 1 Connect the miniature jack of the music source output to the music on hold input on the MSC Refer to Figure 83 Figure 83 Music on hold jack Music jack MSC faceplate Ring Tip Sleeve Tip Music signal ooon Ring No connection Music on hold Sleeve Ground input 2 Adjust the volume of the music source to a good level by activating Background Music and adjusting the volume at the music source TIP You can adjust the Background Music volume at every telephone External Music Source
173. ice i PCI Device Ss The Business Communications Manager System Status Monitor allows you to view the status of the system LEDs on your PC This allows you to make preliminary decisions regarding the type of intervention required without necessarily having to view the Business Communications Manager hardware You can enter the System Status Monitor through the Unified Manager 1 Open the Unified Manager 2 Under Diagnostics click on System Status Monitor The LED Display screen appears Figure 86 System Status Monitor LED Display screen LED Display LED Settings LED Display _ E Power 1 HDD E Watchdog HB Wan E Wan v 30 E HSC On Flash Off On On On On This screen displays the current status of the operational LEDS 3 To set the parameters for the System Status Sanity check click the LED Settings tab The LED Settings record appears Installation and Maintenance Guide 200 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Figure 87 System Status Monitor LED Settings record LED Settings Version fi Reset N A w Sanity Time 240 Timeouts fio Table 45 lists the values on the LED Settings screen Table 45 LED Display screen settings Attribute Values Description Version Read only The current version of the LED monitoring application Reset Yes No N A Use Yes to allow the system status monitor board to reset the computing platform in the event that the sanity check fails
174. ide 12 Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Business Communications Manager system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire Earth Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth via the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections exchange lines removed first P0937235 02 1 13 Additional Safety Information The following interfaces are classified as Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV circuits and may be connected to exposed plant e DTM interface e WAN interface e TCM Isolator The following interfaces are classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV circuits and shall not b
175. igure 46 RJAS5 jack on page 126 7 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 9 Starting the System 127 Connect Wiring to the WAN Card Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable WAN card face To connect the WAN card using the RJ48C connector insert the wide ool C RJ48c jack area network WAN cable into the RJ48C jack on theWAN card For information about the location of the WAN card refer to Figure 46 on page 126 DB26 connector pag female To connect the WAN card using the DB26 connector use an adapter cable to connect the wide area network WAN cable to the DB26 connector on the WAN card These adapter cables are available from your Business Communications Manager supplier Note Not all systems are equipped with a WAN card Table 26 shows the wire connections for a DB25 adapter cable Table 26 DB25 adapter cabl e 1 Chassis Ground 1 14 14 2 Transmit Data 2 15 Transmit Clock 15 3 Receive Data 3 16 16 4 Request to Send 4 17 Receive Clock 17 5 Clear to Send 5 18 18 6 Data Set Ready 6 19 19 7 Signal Ground 7 20 Data Terminal Ready 20 Common Return 8 Data Carrier Detect 8 21 21 9 22 22 10 10 23 23 11 11 24 External Clock 24 12 12 25 25 13 13 26 Installation and Maintenance Guide 128 Chapter 9 Starting the System Connect Wiring to the Modem Card Modem card face Ensure the sys
176. ime Line to a telephone under Line access in System DNs programming Priority Call If you get a busy signal when you call a person in your office you can interrupt that person for an urgent call Enable this feature for a telephone under Capabilities in System DNs programming Private branch exchange PBX A PBX is a telephone system within an enterprise that switches calls between enterprise users on local lines while allowing all users to share a certain number of external telephone lines The main purpose of a PBX is to save the cost of requiring a line for each user to the telephone company central office since the PBX is owned and operated by the enterprise rather than the telephone company protocol A set of rules and procedures for exchanging data between computers or Business Communications Managers on a network or through the Internet Proxy A server that acts on behalf of another Installation and Maintenance Guide 286 Glossary pulse tone dialing Pulse is the traditional method of dialing used by rotary dial or push button single line telephones Tone dialing allows telephones to communicate with other devices such as answering machines You require tone dialing to access the features that PBX systems can provide or to use another system remotely Quality of Service QoS On the Internet and in other networks QoS refers to guaranteed throughput level QoS allows a server to measure improve and to some l
177. in place e width 17 51 inches height 7 05 inches Weight no PCI cards or modules approx 23 Ibs loaded system approx 31 lbs varies depending on power supply Figure 3 shows the location of the hardware components in the Business Communications Manager base unit pre 2 5 versions Nortel Networks recommends that you know the location of the different components before working with the system Figure 4 on page 38 and Figure 5 on page 38 show the two configurations of the Business Communications Manager 2 5 hardware Figure 3 Base unit interior components for standard system pre 2 5 Power supply Fan Hard disk Clock calendar battery O moO I DIMM slots F Media bay module cabinet lalla ay a card slots Installation and Maintenance Guide 38 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Figure 4 Base Unit interior components with a standard power supply system 2 5 Power supply Fan Hard disk Clock calend
178. ing Down the System Software 00 00 c cee eas 204 Shutting Down the System Hardware 0 0 ccc een eens 204 Removing the Top Cover from the Unit 20 0 0 cee eee 205 Removing the Front Bezel nc ccccice en andes cde een ke age ee MURR ORR SEES 206 Restarting the System 0 0 ccc teens 206 Restoring the System to Operation 060 ccc 206 Goltware PGS escurs cece ches ees eRe Ree ee EE N eR Ose eee Ke 207 Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard DISK 1 0 0 cscccs0 sce eden nk eae eae nee e ae ae es 209 Removing the Hard Disk lutte ar ceiasadasea i de nciidd dao nds EEN EEENERRE RETE NENEA 210 Installing a New Fard DIK 2 cckcvcr cd gas udandendeewrdeetadekende cubeauns 212 Mou un ng ie Ra as hieiadawd Medes ee din eber dase niade at 212 Wirth see the Hard DEK asrar eet heed Re Oe a E 213 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan 000e cece eee eee 217 Troubleshooting Fang lt ccscviavecaeeeeseawhu dtid ieri idiot oia Heke deeeans 218 Removing a Fan from the Base Unit 2 60 e405 Ciesitden deer ee dee dewawans 4 218 Replacing the Cooling Fan cccccckeccacae dad cade eae ee ea ddeanan anda 222 Remove the Fan from the Expansion Unit 000 0c eee eee ees 223 Replace the Fan into the Expansion Unit 000 0 eee eee 225 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply sc 2 csicccsesc ess ceasesveavenwenee ns 227 Replacing a Standard Power Supply 00 c eee eee eee eee 227 Removing the
179. ion 170 see Companion and DECT wiring ASM 8 141 cable length 80 81 check before powerup 122 DB15 X 21 adapter cable 129 DSM 141 Ethernet crossover cable 134 FEM 144 grounding 80 LAN card 126 media bay modules 137 modem card 128 modem card DB25 cable 128 null modem cable 132 removing 204 requirements 80 RPI 161 shock warning 209 station media bay modules 141 V 35 adapter cable 129 WAN card 127 P0937235 02 1
180. ired for example auto answer modems FAX Checking the Wiring Check the following connections 1 ATA 2 to the terminal The resistance must be 200 ohms or less for data applications and 1 300 ohms or less for voice applications Business Communications Manager system to ATA 2 The wiring must be equivalent to 800 m of 0 5 mm wire 2 600 ft of 24 AWG or less Do not use bridge taps and loading coils between the Business Communications Manager system and ATA 2 External line to the Business Communications Manager system Ensure the external line is correctly connected to the Business Communications Manager system and make sure there is dial tone Checking for Dial Tone at the ATA 2 Check to ensure there is dial tone from the set and from the ATA 2 module 1 2 If there is no dial tone replace a single line telephone for the data communication device If there is no dial tone at the ATA 2 unit a Disconnect the line side of ATA 2 Connect an Business Communications Manager telephone to the ATA 2 port b Check that the connection from ATA 2 to the Business Communications Manager system is functioning correctly the telephone has dial tone Checking for Trunk Line Dial Tone to the ATA 2 Use the following steps to check for trunk line dial tone to the ATA 2 1 Disconnect ATA 2 external line from the Business Communications Manager system and connect the data device directly to this external line Installation and
181. ities for such applications as voice mail and IP telephony applications The 2 0 version of the server contains four PEC Is If you want to start using IP telephony resources you may want to upgrade to PEC IIIs Or if you started with a basic 2 5 system with two PEC IIIs you may want to add more when you start increasing your IP telephony requirements This chapter describes the processes for removing and replacing a PEC module Figure 127 provides an overview of the process for replacing the PEC Figure 127 PEC replacement overview Ensure you have a current data backup Do a software shutdown Set up unit for maintenance Remove the top cover If required remove PEC module from MSC Warning Incorrect handling of the PEC during installation could result in loss of telephony programming Install the PEC Restore unit to operation Test system A Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully gt Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Installation and Maintenance Guide 244 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware Removing PECs The following s
182. k 125 WAN card 40 installing new hardware 117 offset configurations 99 power supply 233 replacing 119 wiring 137 mounting brackets 83 84 89 91 networking hardware 125 next hop 130 Norstar FEM wiring 144 Nortel Networks address Nashville Tennessee 8 P0937235 02 1 Index 301 Weston Ontario 7 North American components 60 62 65 NT1 BRI connections 140 null modem cable 125 131 132 numbers of extensions 73 O obstructing antennas 175 off premises extension 147 offset 76 offset configurations 99 omnidirectional antenna 177 178 one line display M7100N 65 M7208N 65 T7100 65 T7208 65 optional applications keycodes 136 optional equipment installation checklist 81 OPX 147 outdoor antennas 171 output jack 42 P page output MSC 194 page relay connecting 195 page external paging amplifier 42 paging 42 external 194 external output jack description 42 input 194 page relay jack 195 relay jack description 42 parameters obtaining required values 130 required values 130 passive antenna 175 password hyperterminal 133 patch cable base unit expansion unit connection 92 PC configuring 135 requirements 69 PCI devices 240 MSC description slots number 36 standard MSC card 39 PCI Device LED 240 peripherals ATA2 147 CAP 148 Personal Call Manager 47 phone number modem alternate 130 piggyback fan replacing 222 pin out telephone wiring 137 plug top power supply on base sta
183. k ode GO a eel demeaning Seo aa 130 NAN Re Svea cciiageedes eee ed een esetaie aa 130 Required Data Parameters 6 2i lt cis0ceiendeindeisediuw dees reeds dents 130 Detant IP Seinge ch ncn ele ae aelg are ae a Ae ane na cd al a 130 Connecting When There is an IP Address Conflict 2 0055 131 Using a Null Modem Serial Cable 000 0c eee ee 131 Setting Up the Null Modem Cable 0 0 00 eae 182 Finding the Configuration Menus 20000 cee eee eee eee 133 Using an Ethernet Crossover Cable 0 0 020 e eee eee ee 134 Setting the Crossover Connections 002 ccc eee eee 134 Configuring Your Computer 000 c eee eee eee 135 P0937235 02 1 Contents 19 Connecting the Ethernet Crossover Cable 0000 e ee eee 135 Entering the software keyCodes 5 ici 55cscds sees vees beans vvedseeesvwes 136 Chapter 10 WHEING the Modules ss6 06 seve ccc dsceteneaees a snes seb inne 137 Module PME NS cs cer ora eeu ple ae we aR ayhae er ndae payee nas 138 Connecting Media Bay Modules to Service Providers 00000000 139 Wiring Media Bay Modules to Internal Connections 00000000 141 FEM WIIG 2200s cee ncee eke aciesesacanras EAEE A EEEE aE R a 144 Connecting the Fiber Cables 0 0000 cece eee 145 Chapter 11 Installing Telephones and Peripherals 0200eeeee ences 147 Digital and Analog Telephones 00 cee eee tenes 1
184. k the following environment requirements for the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Line voltage 120 V 102 132 V ac Line voltage 230 V 207 253 V ac Temperature 0 50 C 32 122 F Relative humidity 5 95 non condensing Bridge taps Not allowed between the Business Communications Manager system loading coils and Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Operating Requirements The following are requirements for operating other analog or data communication devices Ringing signal North America 20 Hz 1 Hz Frequency Voltage 80 V rms 10 Ringing signal Europe 25 Hz 1 Hz Frequency voltage 75 V rms 10 Ringer equivalence number 3 Battery feed voltage 48 V dc 10 Loop current 20 mA minimum Installation and Maintenance Guide 184 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters FIC code OL13ABC Business Communications Manager ATA 2to 135 ohms maximum for example 800 m of Business Communications Manager system 0 5 mm wire or 2 600 ft of 24 AWG wire loop resistance cable only Analog loop resistance on terminal side for 1 300 ohms maximum for example 4 600 m of voice applications cable only 0 4 mm wire or 15 000 ft of 26 AWG wire Analog loop resistance on terminal for data 200 ohms maximum for example 730 m of applications cable only 0 4 mm wire side or 2 400 ft of 26 AWG wire Analog Transmission Parameters North American systems only The following are the required analo
185. ked over DPNSS to other Enterprise Edge systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected This allows connected Enterprise Edge systems to function like a private network DPNSS is available for International systems only directory number DN A unique number that the Business Communications Manager system assigns to every telephone or data terminal P0937235 02 1 Glossary 279 disconnect supervision A feature that enables the system to detect if an external caller hangs up Enable Disconnect Supervision under Trunk Line data in Lines programming Do Not Disturb A feature that stops calls from ringing at a telephone Only Priority Calls ring at the telephone when this feature is set A line button flashes when a call is received but the set does not ring domain name The domain name is used to translate Internet IP addresses into common language to allow for easier user access Domain Name Server DNS The domain name system or server is the system that maps names of objects into IP numbers or other resource record values dual tone multifrequency DTMF Two distinct telephone signaling tones used for dialing dynamic IP address This feature is provided by an IP address server which assigns an IP address to a computer every time it logs on to the network Emergency 911 dialing The ability to access a public emergency response system by dialing the digits 9 1 1 emergency tel
186. lacement parts P0937235 02 1 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware 247 Replacing Memory DIMM Chips You replace a DIMM when the DIMMs fails or when you want to increase the amount of RAM in the Business Communications Manager base unit Note There must be at least one DIMM installed in the Business Communications Manager base unit in order for the system to function 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting Down the System Software on page 204 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the base unit for maintenance as described in Shutting Down the System Hardware on page 204 3 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Note If you are adding a new DIMM to the second DIMM slot go to step 6 gt 4 Carefully push down on the fastening tabs on either side of the DIMM you want to remove As you press down on the fastening tabs the DIMM lifts out of the DIMM slot 5 Remove the DIMM from the slot by grasping either end as shown in Figure 128 on page 244 Figure 130 Removing and replacing the DIMMs eas Installation and Maintenance Guide 248 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware 6 Slide the new DIMM edge connectors first into the slot Note The DIMM has two notches on the edge
187. latform Initialization Menu screen Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager Platform Initialization Menu Select the hardware profile for this unit load an Etiquette core load to the MSC load an CT2 Plus core load to the MSC load an El core load to the MSC load an El Global core load to the MSC load an CALA core load to the MSC ggle the automatic MSC upload Enabled Upload the System Status Monitor firmware ain Menu a oT 10 10 t0 TO BEonoowk wn r C Note Selections 2 6 enable you to upload the MSC software for your region Make a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M a Enter the number beside the upload for the software you want to install If you do not know which software to upload refer to Core Software and Regions on page 255 b Next you need to ensure the correct MSC configuration has been entered Enter 1 Select the hardware profile for this unit The screen shown in Figure 98 appears Figure 98 Platform Initialization Menu screen Nortel Networks Business Communications Manager Default MSC Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Image 1 BCM WVMN CONFIG WAN v 90 MSC NIC ETQ 2 BCM NVMN CONFIG NIC v 90 MSC NIC ETQ 3 BCM INMN CONFIG IWAN NIC MSC NIC El 4 BCM N_MN CONFIG NIC MSC NIC El 5 Base Platform n a n a MSC NIC n a 6 Select an alternate MSC image to load M Return to the Main Menu BC
188. le These numbers are used to access the base stations when you disable them to turn mobile recording on when you subscribe new handsets Warning Plug each base station in sequentially Ensure that each base station starts to A perform the startup sequence before plugging in the next base station You can check base station states through the DECT module interface Warning For detailed information refer to the DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Figure 73 demonstrates these connections Figure 73 R451 connectors on the DECT media bay module Installation and Maintenance Guide 182 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems P0937235 02 1 183 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters This chapter provides installation instructions for the Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA 2 The Analog Terminal Adapter 2 Business Communications Manager ATA 2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to the Business Communications Manager system Examples of analog voice devices are single line telephones or answering machines Examples of data communication devices are modems and fax machines The Business Communications Manager ATA 2 provides on premise service only unexposed plant only Before Installation Before you attempt to install an ATA 2 device ensure that your system and environment meet the requirements listed in this section Environmental Requirements Chec
189. le for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Important Safety Instructions The following safety instructions cover the installation and use of the Product Read carefully and retain for future reference Installation Warning To avoid electrical shock hazard to personnel or equipment damage observe the following precautions when installing telephone equipment 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations 3 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 4 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product Installation and Maintenance Guide This symbol on the product is used to identify the following important information Use only with a CSA or UL certified CLASS 2 level C power supply as specified in the user guide Use When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 11 12 13 14 15 Read and understand all instructions Follow th
190. lect Enter these switch settings eaeh And this Custom DN DS30 DS30 channel offset 1 these lines range channel and DNs 91 94 99 102 107 110 115 118 DS30 channel 7 301 316 on kkk on on on on on on on on on on The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split you cannot configure this module for DS30 channel 6 since DS30 channel 7 is not available for the second level on Not supported ASM 8 Switch Settings Two ASM units can share a DS30 channel number Table 20 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the dialing numbers DNs assigned to each DS30 channel Table 20 ASM 8 switch settings Select 2 3 Select 0 1 0 0 Enter these switch settings on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on aa on on on on on on on on on on on on on To assign eae Custom DN range channel offset 4 2 3 4 5 6 these DNs 221 228 229 236 EE eee S 237 244 1 of _off 245 252 ea e 253 260 261 268 Installation and Maintenance Guide 110 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings Table 20 ASM 8 switch settings Continued Select Enter the
191. lephone To discover the system status of a telephone you must know the DN of the set and which port on the Business Communications Manager the set is connected to If the tables in Chapter 14 Installing Optional Telephony Equipment on page 193 were filled out when the telephone were installed refer to them to determine the port each set is attached to To find out the status of a set 1 Open the Unified Manager 2 Click Resources Media Bay Modules Bus Bus is the DS30 channel connected to the media bay modules supporting the telephone line 3 Click Port Port is the port connected to the telephone Click Channels Click on B1 or B2 to view the appropriate DN number State indicates the state the set is in Installation and Maintenance Guide 254 Chapter 21 Replacing Telephones Replacing Telephones with Different Models If you disconnect a digital or analogy telephone and connect a new telephone of a different type into the same jack for example replacing an T7310 telephone with an M7324 the new telephone keeps the old extension number but does not retain the user parameters The new telephone receives a default profile for a telephone of its type Refer to the Business Communications Manager Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide for set configuration information If the new telephone has fewer lines than the old one automatic outgoing line selection cannot work with the Handsfree Mute feature You must
192. liary ringer 193 description 39 external music source 195 external paging 194 inserting card 242 page output jack 194 page relay 195 page signal output jack 194 remove LAN card 240 removing cables 116 removing front cover 206 CAPN 66 M7000 65 M7I100N 65 Multimedia Call Center requires a keycode 47 Multimedia Call Center requires keycode 47 music on hold M7208N 65 M7310N 65 M7324 65 M7324N 65 T7100 65 T7208 65 T7316 65 Message Networking requires a keycode 46 microprocessor 36 miniature jack 196 minimum distances Companion base station 167 mobiles by region 259 modem card auxiliary jack 58 backup to integrated QOS routing 40 DB15 X 21 adapter cable 129 DB25 cable wiring 128 internal V 90 interface 40 required parameters 130 V 35 adapter cable wiring 129 wiring 128 Modem transmission compatibility 190 modem external connecting an ATA2 186 module switches overview 50 modules determining DIP switch settings 98 DS30 channel hierarchy 95 connecting 196 copyright 6 music source permission 6 specifications 195 network conflicts 125 equipment registration 4 initial parameters 131 interface 130 interface card 134 regulatory 6 routing 48 standards 5 networking card combinations 126 conflicts 130 connecting LAN 126 connecting modem card 128 connecting WAN 127 DPNSS 45 Ethernet crossover cable 134 LAN card 40 MCDN requires keycode 45 modem card 40 subnet mas
193. ll Manager application 47 Service Provider 47 TCM connections base station 169 TCP IP protocol 134 technical requirements documents 6 telecommunication network voltage TNV 140 telecommunications company rights 6 telecommunications registration information 5 telephone wiring 137 telephones adding wireless units 155 adjust background music volume 196 ATA2 147 CAP 148 CAP M7324 66 CAP M7324N 66 Companion 151 controlling from the PC 47 DECT 151 emergency 149 Etiquette C3050 CT2 portable 67 12050 soft phone 47 IP telephone 47 65 150 M7000 65 M7100 65 M7100N 65 M7208 65 M7208N 65 M7310N 65 M7316 65 M7324 65 M7324N 65 moving 154 replacing 253 replacing with different type 254 replacing with same type 253 supported 81 supported list 40 Telephony Application Program Interface 47 telephony components 39 description 39 installation overview 51 P0937235 02 1 Index 305 television reception 9 temperature 79 template choosing 135 termination analog port 185 text conventions 30 time zones by country 264 tip 29 193 194 195 196 tools for repairs 203 installation 82 shock warning 210 transmission rates ATA2 190 transmit 133 transmit clock 127 128 129 transmit data 127 128 129 troubleshooting antistatic grounding strap 203 emergency telephone 200 hardware tools 203 media bay modules 120 removing the cover 205 removing the hard disk 210 replacing telephones with same type 2
194. ll the telephones and peripheral equipment if new system a Attach the cables for the telephones to the connecting blocks b Install the telephones Installation and Maintenance Guide 144 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules Refer to Chapter 14 Installing Optional Telephony Equipment on page 193 3 Plug the female amphenol connector into the interface on the front of the module 4 Continue with system setup To install telephone sets refer to Chapter 14 Installing Optional Telephony Equipment on page 193 To install a Companion system refer to The Companion Wireless System on page 155 To install a DECT module refer to Installing DECT systems on page 181 and the DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide To connect analog equipment to a digit line refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 183 FEM Wiring A Fiber Expansion module FEM allows you to upgrade from a Norstar system to a Business Communications Manager system by reusing the Norstar expansion modules The expansion modules connect to the FEM module using the same fiber cable that connected them to the Norstar main housing A Warning Handling optical fiber cables If the cable is too long ensure that it is coiled correctly Coil excess fiber carefully Coil excess fiber cable carefully around the spool provided Do not bend the cable around any tight corners Bends in the fiber cable must not b
195. local area network LAN and or your wide area network WAN For instructions about how to install the data networking components refer to Connecting the Data Networking Hardware on page 125 Systems are shipped with a default IP and subnet mask You must change these settings to suit your system Refer to Initializing the System on page 130 which also describes how to set up your computer to access the Quick Start Wizard which you use to perform system configuration Refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide for details about the Quick Start Wizard The telephony components of the Business Communications Manager system provide call processing and connection to the public telephone system For instructions about how to install telephones and components refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 183 and Chapter 14 Installing Optional Telephony Equipment on page 193 The Companion system provides wireless service between mobile sets and stationary sets within the Business Communications Manager system The DECT module provides system connection for cordless handsets that can act as mobile sets or as standalone sets These applications are region based Refer to Mobility Services by Region on page 259 For instructions about installing a Companion system refer to Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems on page 155 The DECT module has a
196. ls with the exception of two offsets Table 63 demonstrates this combination including the switch settings for each module Table 63 DSM combined with 2 DTMs and 2 ASMs Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting DS30 2 channel DSM 32 ASM 8s DTMs Offset 0 and 1 Offset 0 12 3 4 5 6 DSM 32 settings on on on on on on DSM 16 settings on on on on off_on ASM8 settings on on on on ASM8 settings on P0937235 02 1 Media Bay Module Combinations 271 DECT Combinations This section describes a system containing a DECT module three BRI modules and two DSM 32s This configuration uses all the DS30 channels with the exception of one offset Note DECT systems are not available for all profiles Refer to Mobility Services by Region on page 259 Table 64 demonstrates this combination including the switch settings for each module Table 64 Three BRI modules two DSM 32s and 1 DECT module 3 Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module DS30 DECT BRI DSM 32s channel Offset 0 Offset 0 1 and 2 Offset 0 2 3 4 DECT switch settings Switch setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 on on on on on on on on on on BRI settings BRI settings BRI settings Installation and Mainten
197. ly bracket screw Figure 110 demonstrates this Figure 110 Removing power supply bracket single power supply models Power supply bracket screw P0937235 02 1 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply 229 7 Remove the power supply bracket 8 Remove the four power supply screws from the back of the Business Communications Manager base unit Refer to Figure 111 Figure 111 Remove the power supply screws Version 2 0 hardware version 2 5 hardware QRERSZORERERO OROROORO ODO QEOQEQ 9 Remove the power supply from the chassis Installing a Standard Power Supply Follow these steps to install a standard power supply 1 Check to see if the new power supply is an auto adjust power supply This means the power supply does not have voltage switch Otherwise set the switch to the same ac voltage as the power supply you removed Place the new power supply into the Business Communications Manager base unit Align the screw holes in the housing with the screw holes in the base unit Secure the housing with screws Inside the unit reconnect the power supply cables Replace the cover N Oo oO FR WO ND Restore the unit to operation For details refer to Restarting the System on page 206 Installation and Maintenance Guide 230 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply 8 Monitor the power LED Refer
198. ly system Replacing a Standard Power Supply If the server or expansion cabinet has a standard power supply that fails then all activity on the system ceases Figure 109 provides an overview of the process for replacing a standard power supply Figure 109 Standard power supply replacement overview System down Set up unit for Reconnect power maintenance supply cables Check connections Remove failed power supply Install new power Restore unit to supply operation Check power LED Installation and Maintenance Guide 228 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply Removing the Standard Power Supply If the standard power supply fails the system will be down Follow these steps to remove the power supply 1 Set up the server for maintenance by removing all the cables from the front of the base unit then disconnect the base unit and the expansion unit if there is one from the ac power connection Remove the cover from the base unit Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Remove the power supply cables from the motherboard media bays and hard disk Note If you have an updated system with a piggy back fan arrangement the rear fan will be connected to a power supply cable 5 Cut the cable ties that hold the power cables to the Business Communications Manager base unit 6 Remove the power supp
199. m rack functions or wall Place on static free surface Special Tools Before you replace the components ensure you have the following equipment e Phillips screwdriver 2 with a blade 3 5 in long e 3 16 inch slot screwdriver e antistatic grounding strap Caution You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when handling or electronic components Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment Installation and Maintenance Guide 204 Chapter 16 Preparing Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Shutting Down the System Software The Business Communications Manager system requires a controlled shutdown to guarantee the integrity of the file system Sometimes this may not be possible for instance if a hard drive fails However as long as you have access to the Unified Manager perform the following procedures before removing power from the system 1 ON Oa FF WwW 9 Start a web browser on a computer with a LAN connection to the Business Communications Manager system Enter the IP address of the Business Communications Manager system and the port number for Business Communications Manager Unified Manager 6800 For example http 10 10 10 1 6800 Click the Configure button Type your user name in the Login box The default user name is supervisor Type your password in the Password box The default password is visor Choose System Click the Logoff menu and then click Shu
200. media bay module Reverse the procedure to remove modules 1 Ensure that the switches on the media bay module are set correctly For information about how to set the switches refer to Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules on page 115 In the case of FEM modules the switches activate the front ports Ensure that the switches accurately reflect the ports you require Refer to FEM Switch Settings on page 113 2 Remove the front bezel from the unit where you want to install or remove the module by grasping the edges and pulling forward Refer to Figure 41 Figure 41 Removing the front bezel ES Grasp the edge of the front bezel and pull it forward Business Communications Manager base unit Business Communications Manager expansion unit 1 Push against the bottom 2 Pull out from the top 3 Select an open media bay 4 Pull the latch beside the selected bay to release the media bay bezel Refer to Figure 42 Figure 42 Identifying the media bay module latches
201. mmunications Manager e universal service order code USOC e service order code SOC e facility interface code FIC Installation and Maintenance Guide Use of a Music Source In accordance with U S Copyright Law a license may be required from the American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold or Background Music features of this telecommunication system Nortel Networks hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license Rights of the Telecommunications Company If the Business Communications Manager system is causing harm to the telephone network the telecommunications company may discontinue service temporarily If possible the telecommunications company will notify you in advance If advance notice is not practical the user will be notified as soon as possible The user will be given the opportunity to correct the situation and informed of the right to file a complaint to the FCC The telecommunications company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of the system If this happens the telecommunications company will give you advance notice in order for you to make any necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service Repairs In the event of equipment malfunction all repairs to certified equipment will be per
202. mmunications Manager core system components overview Internal sets Telephones and Adapters on page 65 Business Communications Manager features System Options on page 45 LAN WAN network Data Networking Components on page 40 o o aoooo GG000 o ol o cS __s__ dt o 20 00 0 A 00AOQO ol f w c w a D W 000 o sel Business Communications Business Communications Manager base unit Manager Expansion Unit Telephony Components on page 39 on page 49 Data Networking Components on page 40 External sets Installation and Maintenance Guide 36 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Note Some of the components described in this document are not available in all areas Ask your Business Communications Manager sales agent for information about availability Computer Components The Business Communications Manager base unit computing functions are supported by the following hardware e Intel microprocessor e memory 256 MB SDRAM 128 MB SDRAM added for 2 0 upgrades e hard disk 20 GB hard disk 2 5 hardware 8 4 GB hard disk 2 0 hardware e four PCI slots containing one MSC and four possible combinations of WAN LAN and
203. mmunications Manager system Table 4 Trunk media bay modules DTM Connects digital public switched Can connect to four types of lines TI Digital Trunk Media Bay Module telephone lines to the Business NA PRI ETSI in UK only and Euro Communications Manager system PRI BRI Connects a maximum of four ISDN Note The DECT module contains the Basic Rate Interface Media Bay BRI S T interfaces equivalent of a BRI module and does Module not require a separate module for trunk line functions P0937235 02 1 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware 57 Digital Trunk Media Bay Module The Digital Trunk media bay module DTM connects a standard digital PSTN line to the Business Communications Manager using either a digital or PRI line e On North American Business Communications Manager systems the DTM connects to a T1 or PRI line With a T1 line you can add a maximum of 24 digital telephone lines With a PRI line you can add a maximum of 23 digital telephone lines e On International Business Communications Manager systems the DTM connects to an ETSI or PRI digital line With an ETSI or PRI line you can add a maximum of 30 digital telephone lines The front bezel of the DTM has a RJ48C connector that connects the DTM to the service provider connection point The faceplate also has a set of loopback connectors you can use to run loopback tests For details on loopback tests refer to the Business Communications Manager
204. mmunications Manager system To install an emergency telephone on the Business Communications Manager system connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM When you make a call from the emergency telephone the auxiliary port uses the telephone line connected to the Line 1 port of the CTM TIP You can connect an emergency telephone to every CTM installed on your Business Communications Manager system Use the following steps to install the emergency telephone 1 Connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM 2 Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the Line 1 port of the CTM Installation and Maintenance Guide 150 Chapter 11 Installing Telephones and Peripherals Installing IP Telephones The Business Communications Manager currently supports the Nortel Networks i2004 IP telephone and the Nortel Networks i2050 Software Phone The system automatically assigns DNs to these sets in the digital set range Ensure that the DN type in each DN record is set to IP telephony e BI line DNs can default to unused DNs from 221 to 376 B2 line DNs can default to unused DNs from 377 to 472 For details about configuring DN records refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide Use Table 35 to record the DNs for your IP sets Table 35 IP telephony DNs P0937235 02 1 Chapte
205. module 59 digital lines 4X16 60 digital loop 80 digital station media bay module 60 digital station module 4X16 combination module 60 DSM 16 overview 40 DSM32 overview 40 digital telephone 4X16 module 60 61 BRIM S T module 59 DSM 16 and DSM 32 modules 60 DSM16 module overview 40 DSM32 overview 40 DTM module 57 digital trunk module DTM 57 DTM description 39 digitizing analog equipment ATA2 147 DIMM replacing 244 247 see also memory DIP switch settings ASM 109 BRI 103 CTM 104 106 DECT settings 112 determining the settings 98 DSM 111 DTM 101 FEM settings 113 offset 76 overview 50 directional antenna 176 disable CSU disconnect base unit and expansion unit 204 disk space 36 DNs ASM DIP switch settings 109 ATA2 188 DECT 112 DIP switch settings 101 DS30 channel range 96 DSM switch settings 111 see also extensions start DN 96 DNS server 130 domain Hyperterminal 133 DPNSS networking 45 DS256 port 92 DS30 channels 2 channel modules 95 ASM switch settings 109 BRI switch settings 103 channel split describing channel splitting 75 Companion 96 CTM switch settings 104 106 DIP switch settings 98 99 DSM switch settings 111 DTM switch settings 101 hierarchy 95 offset configurations 76 sharing offsets 76 DSM 4X16 combination module 61 4X16 module 39 Installation and Maintenance Guide 296 Index 4X16 settings 108 DIP switch settings 99 111 DS30 channel hierarchy 96 DS30 channel req
206. module status LED Rocker switches 12 Turn on the switches for both power modules 13 Restore the units to operation as described in Restarting the System on page 206 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord System recovery takes several minutes to complete The LEDs on the power supply are on when the ac power is connected P0937235 02 1 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply 235 Replacing a Redundant Power Supply Module If the green LED for the power supply is not lit but the power switch on the module is still on it indicates that the module has failed Es Note It is not necessary to remove power from the Business Communications Manager gt base unit or expansion unit to replace a redundant power supply module Follow these steps to replace the redundant power supply module 1 4 Turn the module switch to OFF Remove the screw from right hand tab Grasp the handle on the module and at the same time pull the locking tab on the left of the module towards the handle of the module Pull the module straight forward and out of the housing Refer to Figure 119 Figure 119 Removing the power module oO ON OO Oo Locking tab Module screw Ensure the switch on the replacement module is off Insert the replace module into the empty slot in the power supply housing Secure with a screw in the tab located on the right side of the m
207. mpatible with all commercial FAX and modem protocols When connected to an ATA 2 the Business Communications Manager system supports data transmission rates a maximum of and including 28 8 kbit s Note Nortel Networks cannot guarantee the maximum data transmission rate because the maximum rate is subject to the quality of the end to end channel P0937235 02 1 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 191 Installing a Data Communication Device Figure 79 shows the hardware configuration for connecting a data communication device through an ATA 2 to the Business Communications Manager Figure 79 Data communication device installation overview ATA 2 power cord ce AONA Data communication Business Communications device Central Manager Office Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 200 ohms maximum The following steps explain how to install an ATA 2 to a data communication device 1 Connect a single line telephone to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 2 Check that the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 is in theTones OFF mode lift the handset and enter Link ale Note Link appears as Recall on some telephones If you are using a telephone without a Link or Recal button refer to the ATA 2 User Guide for details 3 Make sure the termin
208. mplete path of a voice or data connection between one telephone or other device and another line number A number that identifies an external line The total number of lines depends on the number and type of trunk media bay modules installed line pool Lines grouped in a common pool that assigned telephones can access to make external calls Assign a line to be part of a line pool under Trunk Line data in Lines programming Line Redirection A feature that allows you to redirect all calls on an incoming line to a destination outside the system You can set up the system to ring briefly when a call comes in on a redirected line under Capabilities in System DNs programming This feature is different from Call Forward in two ways Line redirection redirects only external calls and redirects calls to destinations outside the system Call forward redirects calls only to destinations within the system P0937235 02 1 Glossary 283 Link If the Business Communications Manager system is connected to a Private Branch Exchange PBX the Link signal is used to access special features The Link signal can be included as part of a longer stored sequence on an External Autodial button or in a Speed Dial code The Link symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence Local Area Network LAN A network of interconnected computers such as the Business Communications Manager sharing the resources of a single processor or server wit
209. n 168 CAP 148 Companion 155 data networking hardware 125 emergency telephone 149 equipment and supplies 81 external music source 195 external paging 194 hard disk 212 in rack 83 89 internal wiring requirements 80 LAN card 242 leaving space 87 lightning surge protector 180 mounting brackets 84 on a wall 84 on table or shelf 87 92 optional equipment 81 redundant power supply 233 tools required 82 wall mounting bracket 91 installing media bay modules 117 remove power 116 the base unit in a rack 84 Integrated QoS Routing 48 Intel microprocessor 36 internal components base unit 38 internal components Business Communications Manager base unit 37 internal wiring requirements 80 International components 65 66 internet network routing software 48 PC requirements 69 intranet telephony 47 IP address configuring the PC 135 connecting the hardware 125 default 130 required parameters 130 subnet mask 125 IP telephone 12050 soft phone 47 install chart 150 overview 47 65 VoIP Gateway application 47 ip telephone changing the channel split 75 ISDN BRI overview 39 line services by region 257 trunk module 59 J jack external paging 42 page relay 42 K keycode Attendant Console 45 Call Center 46 Call Center Agents 45 Call Center Reporting 46 DPNSS networking 45 entering 136 fax Fax Mail 46 LAN CTE MCDN 45 Message Networking 46 Multimedia Call Center 47 Professional Call Center 46 Q SIG Voice Messaging
210. n to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information e Itis no longer necessary to notify the Telephone Company of your phone s Registration and REN numbers However you must provide this information to the telephone company if they request it The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operation or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modification to maintain uninterrupted service e Do not attempt to repair this equipment If you experience trouble write for warranty and repair information Nortel Networks 640 Massman Drive Nashville TN 37210 USA Ringer Equivalence Number The FCC Registration label on bottom of phone includes a Ringer Equivalence Number REN which is used to determine the number of devices you may connect to your phone line A high total REN may prevent phones from ringing in response to an incoming call and may make placing calls difficult In most areas a total REN of 5 should permit normal phone operation To determine the total REN allowed on your telephone line consult your local telephone company Hearing Aids This phone is compatible with hearing aids equipped with an appropriate telecoil option Programming Emergency Numbers When progr
211. nager Installation and Maintenance Guide 72 Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System Selecting the Trunk Media Bay Modules The number and type of lines coming into your system determine which trunk media bay modules and how many modules you require to support your needs Trunk lines come from either the public network PSTN or they support connections in a private network To select the trunk media bay modules 1 Record the number of each type of line you have in Table 8 If you do not know the number or type of lines you have contact your service provider If you are setting up an entirely new system a site survey must be done to determine your current and future needs We recommend that you do the survey before you order any modules Note If you add any lines in the near future include them in your initial estimates gt Table 8 Determining trunk module requirements T1 digital lines DTM 24 DTM PRI digital lines NA DTM 23 DTM required for Companion wireless E1 digital lines DTM 30 DTM PRI digital lines EMEA DTM 30 DTM Analog lines CTM 4 CTM North American systems only Analog lines CTM8 8 CTM North American systems only Analog lines 4X16 combination 4 CTM module also requires a North American full DS30 channel system only for the DNs BRI ISDN lines BRIM S T 4 ISDN loops BRIM S T Cordless handsets DECT DECT 4 ISDN loops DECT selec
212. nal adapter ATA A device that connects analog telecommunication devices such as fax machines answering machines and single line telephones to the Business Communications Manager system through a Digital station module Application program interface API An application program uses this interface to make requests of the operating system or another application The API is an interface to an operating system or a program asynchronous A method of transmission where the time intervals between characters are not required to be equal and signals are sourced from independent clocks with different frequencies and phase relationships Start and stop bits may be added to coordinate character transfer autodial button A memory button that provides one touch dialing out automatic daylight savings time A feature that switches the system to standard or daylight savings time at programmed times Assigns automatic daylight savings time under Daylight time in System programming automatic telephone relocation A feature that maintains personal and system programing for a telephone keep when the telephone gets moved to a different modular jack Enable Automatic Telephone Relocation under Set relocation in System programming auxiliary ringer An external telephone ringer or bell which rings when a line or a telephone rings Enables the auxiliary ringer under Capabilities under System DNs programming Program an auxiliary ringer in Services
213. nd the base stations Position the power supply connector in the correct direction and push it into place 8 Inthe space provided on the label attached to the lower right corner of the mounting bracket record the port number used Include the marking information for all of the base stations on the completed installation floor plans 9 Slide the cover on the bracket using the guide to position it correctly Refer to Figure 65 10 Snap it into place Figure 65 Slide the cover on bracket Installation and Maintenance Guide 170 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Registering Companion Sets To use Companion portable telephones you must first install radio base stations to transmit and receive radio signals to and from the portable telephones See Installing Companion Base Stations on page 167 You use a different method to install portable telephones than desktop telephones There are no direct connections between the portable telephones and the system Do the following e Install the batteries and battery charging units for each portable using the instructions that come with the portable e Enter the software keys for Companion in the Business Communications Manager Unified Manager under Software keys e Register every Companion portable for use with the system Note You must register a portable telephone before you can use it By default Companion po
214. ne ASM and ASM 8 modules 62 CTM CTM8 module 58 Analog Terminal Adapter 2 see ATA2 analog transmission 184 analog trunk media bay module 58 antenna Canada installation 175 certification 171 Co axial cable maximum length 177 directional installation 176 external 171 178 external installation 171 indoor 177 indoor directional external antenna installation 176 indoor installation 176 indoor omni directional external antenna installation 177 installation restrictions 175 installation strategy 172 Lightning surge protector 180 lightning surge protector 175 maximum length cable 180 omni directional 177 178 outdoor omni directional external antenna installation 178 passive 175 positioning 175 proprietary extension cable 171 RG 58A U coaxial cables 171 U S installation 171 antistatic grounding strap 30 203 API LAN CTE application TSP 47 application requirements 69 applications features 45 ASM ASM 8 description DIP switch settings 99 109 DS30 channel hierarchy 96 DS30 channel requirements 77 hardware description 62 wiring chart 143 Installation and Maintenance Guide 292 Index ASM 8 see ASM ATA2 analog device measurement from CO 185 analog device measurement to CO 185 analog loop resistance 190 configuration requirements 189 connecting 186 data communication 190 data transmission requirements 190 environmental requirements 183 extension DN number 188 external line
215. nels and 32 media channels two DS30 channels are exclusively dedicated to MSC data resources Five paths within these channels have hard coded applications The other paths can be assigned to various data applications such as voice mail dialup ISDN WAN VoIP trunks or IP telephony five DS30 channels are exclusively reserved for the media bay modules The sixth DS30 channel can be switched to accommodate media bay modules or more channels for IP telephones or VoIP trunks You control the use of the channel by your choice of using either a 2 6 or 3 5 DS30 channel split This is set when you run the Quick Start Wizard at the initial startup of the system For more details about deciding which DS30 channel configuration you want for your system refer to Determining Module Channel Requirements on page 77 and to the chapter on configuring MSC Resources in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide PEC IIIs The Business Communications Manager 2 5 uses PEC IIIs to deliver increased capacity for digital signal processing for voice mail call center FAX VoIP trunks IP telephony and dialup ISDN WAN The basic system comes with two PEC IIIs Two more can be added to accommodate increased requirements for media processing Refer to the chapter on configuring MSC Resources in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide P0937235 02 1 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Comm
216. ng ITU T ITU T ITU T Loop Taiwan E amp M DID Ground Fixed trunk types Denmark ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 France ISDN ETSI 300 403 DPNSS Germany MCDN Global ETSI QSIG 300 239 Holland ISDN ETSI 300 403 Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Installation and Maintenance Guide 262 System Region Attributes Table 58 PRI line protocol supported by region Continued Region BRI T side BRIS side PRI T1 Italy ISDN ETSI 300 102 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 ETSI QSIG 300 239 DPNSS MCDN ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 United Kingdom ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 ISDN ETSI 300 403 DPNSS MCDN ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 403 BRI and PRI line types Table 59 provides a description of the types of lines that BRI and PRI trunks can provide These are set under Resources Media Bay Modules Bus XX Module X on the Unified Manager Note that some of these line types are only available when specific regions are chosen Table 59 BRI and PRI line types DTM and BRI modules Digital trunk types Description Ti digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1 544 Mbps North American 30 channels at 2 048 Mbps Europe Loop E amp M DID and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines You can program auto answer T1 loop start T1 E amp M trunks T1 DID T1 ground start trunks PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to
217. ng the hard disk This process describes how to install a new hard disk 1 Ensure you have followed the directions in Removing the Hard Disk on page 210 2 Attach the new hard disk to the brackets Fasten both brackets to the hard disk Position the hard drive with the exposed electronic components facing down Refer to Figure 95 Figure 95 Connect the brackets to the hard disk 3 Place the hard disk assembly back into the Business Communications Manager base unit a Align the holes in the brackets with the holes in the bottom of the inside of the Business Communications Manager base unit b Ensure that the power supply and ribbon cable connectors are toward the MSC card c Fasten the hard disk to the Business Communications Manager base unit 4 Reconnect the drive to the system Note All connectors have a notch that allows you to align the connectors correctly If you cannot push a connector in easily do not force it Connect the power supply to the hard disk connector and the IDE cable from the controller to the hard disk 5 Replace the cover on the server P0937235 02 1 Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard Disk 213 6 Restore the units to operation Refer to Restarting the System on page 206 7 Setup the disk Initialize the hard disk Refer to Initializing the Hard Disk on page 213 After the disk is initialized restore your data from your backups If you did not backup your keycodes re ente
218. nmnis ake a ke Se caer ay Se ache te il Sal aA ae See 158 Gable distales 22nd uterscaciacdaes sobdtReSandees teem naked 161 ORE VANHG cs 254 Sicha s Bae AOR eh ee EE dD hae TR owned 163 RPO BA WW CNNI Gcckucasududirgedadged beatin cienenead ae 163 RPI 16 BIX wimg GHAR iescvceccdade dese desecd seroit rebas 165 Installation and Maintenance Guide 28 Tables Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Minimum distance between office areas and base stations 168 Clearance for the base stations 0 0c eee eee eee 168 UTA WIGSSAOGS 5 cccda che dosd direka Chad ee ae sed duecaceds 170 LED Display screen settings 2 ciccceecaeveceree neve nena cme 200 Fan and temperature LEDs on the server 2200 055 218 Ponor Supp LED occ cvasesd ticks ana diageeceeecee ben aaeds 230 Base unit POI LED Sates 2 esse heen teed dan bese bad b eeh ew aes s 240 Core software defined by region and carrier profile 255 LENQUAQCS oc ck ecw c dearer at edieon ere iden kere ad aden amma as 256 South Central America language breakout 0000000 256 Compan IO rncatgede secret ete eona ers deeneaeasens 257 ISDN line services occ cdeiee edad cebu Sica Geudiseruieeucenee 257 ISDN services by Protocol o0y2sde sedan eas pande
219. nnect the redundant power supply cable to the power cable adapter Refer to Figure 106 Then connect the power cable adapter to an available power supply cable Figure 106 Connect the redundant fan cable to the adapter Redundant fan Redundant fan adapter Spare power supply connector 5 Replace the cover 6 Restore the unit to operation For details refer to Restarting the System on page 206 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord This takes several minutes to complete Remove the Fan from the Expansion Unit The Business Communications Manager expansion unit comes either with one fan or a redundant fan set The single fan unit is not upgradeable Follow these steps to remove a malfunctioning fan 1 Shut down the system following the directions in Removing a Fan from the Base Unit on page 218 2 Disconnect the fan power cable from the hub card Note If the unit has redundant fans each fan has a connector on the hub board gt 3 Locate the screws that fasten the fan casing to the expansion unit back wall and remove them Refer to Figure 107 Remove the four screws that hold the fan to the expansion unit Lift the failed fan out of the expansion unit Installation and Maintenance Guide 224 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan Figure 107 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 0 models Fan connecto
220. nnel numbers if you are using fractional TI system name WAN link protocol frame relay DLCI CIR if applicable V 90 modem settings North America only Default IP Settings All Business Communications Manager systems are shipped with this default address IP 10 10 10 1 Subnet 255 255 255 0 0 Warning Before using this address on your network check with your system administrator If this address conflicts with the LAN settings you can cause network damage if you connect the network without changing the IP address P0937235 02 1 Chapter 9 Starting the System 131 If you can use the default IP address you can connect the Business Communications Manager server to the LAN as described in Connecting Wiring to the LAN Card on page 126 This allows you to configure to the Business Communications Manager system from your PC through the Unified Manager Connecting When There is an IP Address Conflict If you cannot use the default IP address you must change the IP address of the Business Communications Manager system through one of these connections e aterminal and a null modem cable Refer to Using a Null Modem Serial Cable on page 131 e acomputer and an Ethernet crossover cable Refer to Using an Ethernet Crossover Cable on page 134 After you set the initial parameters you can connect to the Unified Manager through the network to complete the system setup using the Quick Start Wizard I
221. nstalling Telephones and Peripherals You can add telephones and peripherals before or after you initialize your system Set configuration is determined by the which station module you are using and what DS30 channel settings you chose for the module Refer to Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules on page 115 The system creates default settings for the telephone DN records when it is first initialized The settings are based on which telephony profile you chose To change these settings use the Unified Manager application Specific instructions for configuring telephone operation through the Unified Manager are contained in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide Note Programming occurs on the set when the Business Communications Manager recognizes the set on the system Digital and Analog Telephones The Business Communications Manager system supports Norstar and Business Series Terminals as well as the Nortel Networks i2004 IP telephones and the Nortel Networks i2050 Software Phone Refer to Telephones and Adapters on page 65 for a description of the sets the system supports Analog telephones are supported either through analog modules ASMs or by connecting to a digital module through an Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA2 Documentation describing installation and set features is supplied with each piece of equipment Caution Do not use telephones as off premises extensions OPX
222. ntact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Notice The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5 This Class A device complies with Part 68 amp Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES 003 Class A Canadian EMI requirements Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Do not attempt to repair this equipment If you experience trouble write for warranty and repair information Nortel Networks 30 Norelco Drive Weston Ontario M9L 2X6 Canada US Regulations please read carefully Federal Communications Commission FCC Notice FCC registration number This telephone equipment complies with Part 68 Rules and Regulations of the FCC for direct connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network The FCC registration number appears on a sticker affixed to the bottom of the telephone Your connection to the telephone line must comply with these FCC rules e An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipm
223. o the far right column where the switch settings are indicated Circle the setting for each module Note If you must assign specific line or extension numbers to a module refer to the individual switch tables in Line and Extension Numbers for Specific Modules on page 101 for line and DN listings Figure 38 How to use the configuration map 1 Indicate the modules you want to install nan pia 2 Note how many DS30 channels each module requires teat a y Media bay module positioning DIP switch setting DS30 chy Oat 1 234 5 6 DSM DSM 32 4x16 ASM DTM CTM CTM offset DS30 ch BRI 16 8 8 2 oN me yon ono on on on OO 7 0 EE EE 1 m e e E E 3 CEE EE 3 Choose the DS30 channels 4 Assign an offset number to 5 Make a note of the DIP switch settings to assign to the modules each module for the DS30 channel offset P0937235 02 1 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 99 Table 12 shows possible DS30 channel and offset configurations for each type of module and the corresponding switch settings For DECT and FEM settings refer to DECT Switch Settings on page 112 and FEM Switch Settings on page 113 Example Position your DSM 16 module step 1 which requires one full DS30 channel step 2 in DS30 channel 2 step 3 Moving across note that the of
224. ocal regulations and include lightning surge protection Read Before You Install Equipment You must install the antenna vertically For more information refer to Figure 66 on page 172 Use 8 12 mm to 50 mm in to 2 in screws to install the antenna bracket and lightning surge protector bracket to the wall Always ensure that the antenna is clear of any adjacent obstruction or metal objects If you use more than one external antenna at a cell center separate the antennas at by least 1 m 40 in to avoid radio interference problems When running the coaxial cable inside or outside be careful not to damage the cable Damage to the cable affects its performance The minimum recommended bending radius is 200 mm 8 in The coaxial cable length must not exceed 10 m 33 ft Use RG 58AU coaxial cables to connect the antennas to the base stations You can attach a proprietary extension cable between the lightning surge protector and the antenna or between the lightning surge protector and the base station Make sure you keep the total cable length as short as possible and use only the recommended extension cable when necessary You must install a lightning surge protector for each external antenna Warning FCC requirements In the United States the FCC requires that you connect only approved antennas to Companion base stations Caution Do not install the outdoor antenna or the lightning surge protector during an elect
225. odem that sends and receives data using the public telephone system The modem card is a V 90 interface modem This modem connects the Business Communications Manager system to the public switched telephone network You can use this connection to manage the Business Communications Manager system from a different location provide dialup backup for a WAN card LAN interface card a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet network interface card that connects the Business Communications Manager system to the local area network WAN interface card a network interface card with a T1 interface and sync port that connects the Business Communications Manager system to the wide area network WAN P0937235 02 1 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 41 The WAN card connects to a T1 PSTN line with an integrated T1 DSU CSUs North American The WAN card can also connect to a T1 PSTN line with an X 21 or V 35 interface Europe Middle East Africa EMEA Media Services Card The Media Services Card MSC a PCI card performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels for the Business Communications Manager system including the VoIP trunks This card also offers connections for auxiliary features including external customer supplied hardware for paging and music on hold Figure 6 shows the location of the MSC on the Business Communications Manager base unit Figure 6 MSC optional equipment ports B
226. odule Turn the module switch to the on position Restore the units to operation as described in Restarting the System on page 206 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord System recovery takes several minutes to complete The LEDs on the power supply are on when the ac power is connected Installation and Maintenance Guide 236 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply Replacing a Power Supply in an Expansion Unit The power supply in the Business Communications Manager expansion unit is exactly the same type of power supply as that in the Business Communications Manager base unit The only difference is that 2 5 version expansion units come with either a standard power supply or redundant power supply In this case the standard power supply cannot be updated to a redundant power supply You must upgrade the entire expansion unit Note Version 2 0 conversion gt If you still have a version 2 0 expansion unit which is larger than the 2 5 versions you can upgrade to a redundant power supply To perform this upgrade follow the instructions for updating the base unit power supply Upgrading to a Redundant Power Supply on page 230 In this configuration the redundant fan would be installed as a piggy back unit The plug for the redundant unit plugs in beside the first unit Refer to Figure 121 on page 237 Note that the version 2 0 cabinets only have one set of fan perfor
227. om this information to help you manage system usage effectively e CallPilot Reference Guide CallPilot is a core Business Communications Manager application It works with the telephone system to provide automated receptionist service by answering incoming calls and routing them to telephones or mailboxes on the system This guide explains what the various parts of the CallPilot application do e CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide and CallPilot Programming Record CallPilot Manager is the web based application that you use to set up and administer CallPilot Automated Attendant is the CallPilot answering service that answers incoming calls with a Company Greeting plays a list of options to a caller and performs call routing functions in response to caller selections CallPilot requires keycodes for additional voice mailboxes provides a voice mail application as part of the core Business Communications Manager programming CallPilot provides voice messaging Automated Attendant and Custom Call Routing features for Business Communications Manager telephony services Voice Mailbox Expansion requires keycode allows you to add extra mailboxes to your voice messaging system The application comes with a keycode that defines how many extra mailboxes are allowed e CallPilot Fax Set up amp Operation Guide and CallPilot Fax User Guide Fax Suite requires keycode a CallPilot optional feature delivers fax messa
228. on on 227 230 3 on on on on 235 238 0 on on on on on 181 184 on on on on 1 189 192 oft ott 2 on on on on 197 200 on on on S j om oft a P0937235 02 1 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 105 Table 17 CTM switch settings Continued Enter these switch settings To assign these lines Select offset 151 154 159 162 167 170 175 178 121 124 129 132 137 140 145 148 91 94 99 102 107 110 115 118 Installation and Maintenance Guide 106 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings CTM8 The CTM8 provides connections for eight analog calling line identification CLID PSTN lines Each line uses one voice line Since each DS30 channel has four lines per offset you require two offsets for each module Therefore you can assign a maximum of two CTM8s to a DS30 channel by making the offset switch settings different for each module You can also combine a CTM8 with a 4X16 module on the same DS30 channel When you choose an offset number for the CTM 8 the system automatically adds the next offset number You cannot assign offset 3 to the CTM8 module because this does not allow the module to assign the second set of lines Table 18 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the resulting line assignments Table 18 CTM8 switch settings Select Select Enter these s
229. oor antenna e Always install the antenna at the cable entry point into the building e Connect the lightning surge protector to ground before connecting the coaxial cable P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 179 To install an outdoor omnidirectional external antenna follow these steps 1 Screw the antenna mounting plate vertically to the exterior wall of the building with lag bolts or other appropriate hardware Figure 71 shows how to fasten the mounting plate Figure 71 Install the outdoor omnidirectional external antenna Canada Mast Connector at the base of the mast Shroud SS Plastic plug gt lt Cable ties Set screw Exterior wall mounting plate L Lag bolts or appropriate mounting hardware ll Co axial cable to surge protector on interior wall 2 Feed one end of the coaxial cable up through the bottom of the antenna cover and attach the BNC connector to the base of the mast Slide the mast down into the cover until it fits Rotate the mast until the threaded hole in the base of the mast aligns with the set screw hole in the cover Tighten the set screw 5 Route the coaxial cable along the bottom edge of the plate between the cover and the wall plate Note The total length of the coaxial cables from the outdoor antenna to the base station must not exceed 10 m 33 ft 6 Tie
230. or modem cards e four PEC slots on the MSC each of which can contain one Processor expansion card PEC I or PEC III card 2 5 e three media bays Hardware Components The main component of the Business Communications Manager system is the Business Communications Manager base unit This hardware controls all data and telephony tasks such as call processing voice messaging and data routing Figure 2 shows the functional hardware as seen from the front of the Business Communications Manager base unit Figure 2 External functional hardware base unit O O ROKEN O O coos 8 8 PAL O O bo Media bay modules O Oo ho oO 290000000000 C E cl OOOO O OOS 3451 O i icat td 000 a 000 Business Communications Manager O z 1 o 000 on ole ee oco f ej c o QO oco eC Je O O PC access ports WAN card Modem card MSC LAN card This is an example of one of four possible profiles 1 Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation P0937235 02 1 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 37 Table 2 provides a table of weights and measurements of the base unit Table 2 Basic Business Communications Manager base unit specifications Size depth 18 28 inches with bezel
231. or expansion card version III Primary rate interface Public switched telephone network Quality of service Q reference point signalling Random access memory Read only memory Station auxiliary power supply Installation and Maintenance Guide 32 Preface TAPI Telephony application program interface TCP IP Transmission control protocol internet protocol UTAM UTAM Inc VoIP Voice over IP WAN Wide area network Related publications The following documents provide further information about the Business Communications Manager and related media bay modules extension equipment and the applications and software on the system refer to e Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming and Operations Guide describes how to program the Business Communications Manager equipment e Telephone Features Programming Guide provides feature descriptions and programming for the numerous telephone features available to users through the buttons on digital telephone sets e Ifyou are not an experienced telephone installer the Business Communications Manager 2 5 BIX Box Wiring Guide provides illustrations for correctly wiring internal cable connections to telephones e All optional Business Communications Manager applications have installation and user guides specific to that application For an overview of what these guides contain refer to Telephony Features and Options on page 45 Attendant Console Setup and Operation Guide
232. ort 607 Port 707 33 Red Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 8 Green Red_ Port 208 Port 308 Port 408 Port 508 Port 608 Port 708 34 Red Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 9 Brown Red_ Port 209 Port 309 Port 409 Port 509 Port 609 Port 709 35 Red Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 10 Slate Red Port 210 Port 310 Port 410 Port 510 Port 610 Port 710 36 Black Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 11 Blue Black Port 211 Port 311 Port 411 Port 511 Port 611 Port 711 37 Black Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 12 Orange Black Port 212 Port 312 Port 412 Port 512 Port 612 Port 712 38 Black Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 13 Green Black Port 213 Port 313 Port 413 Port 513 Port 613 Port 713 39 Black Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 14 Brown Black Port 214 Port 314 Port 414 Port 514 Port 614 Port 714 40 Black Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 15 Slate Black Port 215 Port 315 Port 415 Port 515 Port 615 Port 715 41 Yellow Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 16 Blue Yellow Port 216 Port 316 Port 416 Port 516 Port 616 Port 716 Installation and Maintenance Guide 274 Media Bay Module Combinations P0937235 02 1 275 Glossary access code A unique digit or digits entered by the user to access some telephony features such as Line pools Call park external lines Direct Dial telephone and Auto DN address A unique identifier assigned to networks and stations that allows each device to receive and reply to messages Analog termi
233. ortel Networks does not warrant its telephone sets to be compatible with the equipment of any particular telephone company This warranty does not extend to damage to products resulting from improper installation or operation alteration accident neglect abuse misuse fire or natural causes such as storms or floods after the telephone is in your possession Nortel Networks shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages including but not limited to loss damage or expense directly or indirectly arising from the customers use of or inability to use this telephone either separately or in combination with other equipment This paragraph however shall not apply to consequential damages for injury to the person in the case of telephones used or bought for use primarily for personal family or household purposes Installation and Maintenance Guide This warranty sets forth the entire liability and obligations of Nortel Networks with respect to breach of warranty and the warranties set forth or limited herein are the sole warranties and are in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties or fitness for particular purpose and merchantability Warranty Repair Services Should the set fail during the warranty period In North America please call 1 800 574 1611 for further information Outside North America contact your sales representative for return instructions You will be responsible for ship
234. ounting holes 25 mm 325 mm din Sa 13 in 8 in par eee 300 mm 12 in 2 Open the cover with a screwdriver Use the screwdriver to push in and then down to release the latch on the right side Remove the cover by lifting it up Refer to Figure 59 Figure 59 Opening the RPI cover 3 Hang the RPI on the two screws and tighten the screws 4 Install the remaining two screws Installation and Maintenance Guide 160 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 5 Feed the power cord through the bottom of the RPI and route it through the clip and around the strain relief support Figure 60 shows how to route the power cord Figure 60 RPI components Jumper lead to PSU 2 Grounding plates aN The RPI 8 has grounding straps and plates fitted to allow an upgrade to 0 an RPI 16 PSU 2 Gf equipped Grounding strap Ferrite rings Power supply cabling Up to 16 outputs TCM power Connection board Clip Strain relief support Route the power cord to the input power socket just to the left of PSU 1 Connect the plug to the socket Follow the appropriate wiring instructions in the wiring charts in the next section Wiring the and Connecting the RPT e Caution Do not apply power to the RPI until its installation and wiring are comple
235. over lock screws Refer to Figure 125 for the location of the slot cover lock Figure 125 Slot cover lock osececececesececocece CRORE RO ROR RE RE ROR ERO ERERERER ERE EERE REARS econo cecerecenececene OOOOOCOCCO0O Q O A oco eC oce Ce OOO 6 Remove the slot cover lock 7 Use both hands to carefully hold the card along the top Lift the card straight up and out of the module Installation and Maintenance Guide 242 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware Installing the Card Follow these steps to replace the LAN WAN or modem cards 1 N o Oo FF WO ND Insert the new card in the same PCI slot from which you removed the damaged card Refer to Figure 126 Push the card down until it sits firmly in the connector Fasten the slot cover screw in the modem slot cover Replace the slot cover lock Replace the front cover Replace the top cover Restore the unit to operation For details refer to Restarting the System on page 206 Figure 126 Install the LAN card P0937235 02 1 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware 243 Replacing PECs The Business Communications Manager base unit 2 5 comes equipped with two Processor expansion cards PEC III mounted on the Media services card MSC These modules provide signal processing capabil
236. page 169 Allow for clearances around the base station as indicated in Table 43 Table 43 Clearance for the base stations To install a base station Fasten the bracket into position using two 8 38 mm 1 1 2 in screws 2 Route the cable from the Business Communications Manager system through the top or bottom opening Wind any excess cable around the posts then fasten the cable under the strain relief Connect the wires to the BIX connector on the bracket termination board as shown in Figure 64 Figure 64 Bracket termination board RJ11 jack ig P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 169 The polarity of the TCM connections is not important If you connect the two power pairs to the bracket terminal board of the base station you must connect the power pairs with the same polarity Caution Ensure that the RPI is off before connecting power pairs to the base station Install the base station on the bracket Snap it into position Connect the power RJ 11 jumper lead to the RJ 11 jacks on the termination board and the base station 7 For plug top power supplies only connect the power supply connector to the base station power connector Make sure the base station uses a class 2 plug top power source only Caution If you insert the power supply connector in the wrong direction you can damage the plug top power supply a
237. ping charges if any When you return this telephone for warranty service you must present proof of purchase After Warranty Service Nortel Networks offers ongoing repair and support for this product This service provides repair or replacement of your Nortel Networks product at Nortel Networks option for a fixed charge You are responsible for all shipping charges For further information and shipping instructions In North America contact our service information number 1 800 574 1611 Outside North America contact your sales representative Repairs to this product may be made only by the manufacturer and its authorized agents or by others who are legally authorized This restriction applies during and after the warranty period Unauthorized repair will void the warranty P0937235 02 1 15 Contents North American Regulatory Information 0 2 60ee eee ee oe ee eee 2 Wile apaa aa a aa a E a 2 Enhanced 911 Configuration ssraririsr aneradi r aoa aA 3 Radio frequency Interference ausuasaunanuaanaanaa nnana eee 3 Telecommunication Registration lt e sirrsicsrissrerersiriero siritt eras 4 Network CONN GUION ererrrciisriir odiiy Sheed a a i A a 5 Hearing Aid Company ccc srseerisrurnepa dAkke EEEN EARE 5 Electromagnetic Compatibility lt sss ccc0iee eee e dees detainee eee eines tas 5 Telephone Company Registration 0 0 0 cece eee 5 Usecia MUSIC Soire ccciccage oid dds ange asktir ee KORE eARE STEELE GS
238. prevent the components from overheating This chapter describes how to replace a cooling fan It also describes how to add a redundant fan to two versions of the base unit Note A redundant cooling fan is included in the kit when you add a redundant power supply to the server Figure 99 provides an overview of the fan replacement process Note 2 5 hardware The cooling fan connections on the Business Communications Manager server 2 5 hardware connect to the system status module SSM Ensure that you follow the directions provided for this version of the hardware when reconnecting new fans Figure 99 Fan replacement overview FAN LED and or temp LED indicate problem Set up unit for maintenance Install new fan Connect fan cables to power Disconnect and remove failed fan Restore unit to operation Check fan LED Installation and Maintenance Guide 218 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan Troubleshooting Fans There are two LEDs on the front of the Business Communications Manager server and one on the front of the expansion cabinet that can be used to assess fan function Refer to Figure 100 Figure 100 Business Communications Manager base unit operational LEDs O NORTEL NETWORKS O O ro Operation LEDs
239. propriate trunk modules Wire internal 25 pair cables to station set distribution BIX block for your building Connect amphenol cable to appropriate station modules Continue with setup procedures Module Wiring Warnings A Warning Electrical shock warning The Business Communications Manager media bay modules have been Safety approved for installation into Business Communications Manager base units and expansion units It is the responsibility of the installer and user to ensure that installation of the Business Communications Manager hardware does not compromise existing Safety approvals BEFORE YOU OPEN the Business Communications Manager base unit or Business Communications Manager expansion unit ensure that the network cables are unplugged and the unit is disconnected from the ac power source Station modules The ports on these modules are meant to be connected only to approved digital telephones and peripherals with the proper cables on a protected internal system Do not connect any telephones to wiring that runs outside of the building Read and follow the installation instructions carefully P0937235 02 1 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules 139 Connecting Media Bay Modules to Service Providers To connect DTM CTM CTM8 4X16 CTM or BRI media bay modules to the network follow these steps 1 On the front of the module locate the RJ48C socket DTM RJ45 sockets
240. provide for attendant bypass calling directly to a department or individual and line concentration one trunk can map onto several target lines DID This is a type of T1 trunk line that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Loop This is a type of T1 line This type of line is used on systems where the service provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks These trunks provide remote access to the Business Communications Manager from the public network This trunk must have disconnect supervision to allow the trunk to be set to auto answer which provides the remote access portal Ground T1 groundstart trunk These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks but are used when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks Ground start trunks work with T1 only By configuring lines as ground start the system will be able to recognize when a call is released at the far end E amp M T1 and E amp M This type of trunk line is used to create simple network connections to other phone systems This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode P0937235 02 1 System Region Attributes 263 Table 59 BRI and PRI line types DTM and BRI modules Continued Digital trunk types Description PRI ISDN interface with 23 B channels an
241. r Route and connect the coaxial cable from the lightning surge protector to the appropriate base station connector Refer to Figure 68 on page 174 Installation and Maintenance Guide 174 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Tip Wiring information The recommended wire gauge is 6 AWG Connect the ground lead to the building ground Do not connect to a ground rod or series of ground rods If you cannot connect the ground lead to the building ground connect the ground lead to the metal frame of the building The connection must be no more than six to 10 ft You can connect the ground lead to the 120 V ac conduit which is connected to the building ground However using the ac conduit is not the preferred method of installation The connector between the antenna and the lightning surge protector and between the lightning surge protector and the base station is a proprietary BNC connector You must align the BNC connectors before you can make the connection Figure 68 Lightning surge protector and bracket USA P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 175 Installing Antennas Canada There are three types of external antennas available in Canada e indoor directional antenna e indoor omnidirectional antenna e outdoor omnidirectional antenna Each type of installation requires a specific installation technique As well you must install a lightning surge pro
242. r 11 Installing Telephones and Peripherals 151 Installing Radio based Portable Systems There are two types of radio based systems available for the Business Communications Manager system Availability depends on the geographical location of the system and is determined by the region you select for the system during system configuration Companion Wireless Systems In North America you can install the Companion Wireless system which allows you to provide wireless units that are tied to stationary sets This allows you to accommodate users who are mobile within the range of the system You can add up to 60 Companion handsets on a fully configured Companion system Mobility Services by Region on page 259 lists the region profiles that can accommodate the Companion system Refer to Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems on page 155 for installation instructions DECT Systems A DECT module installed into the Business Communications Manager provides a pathway for a maximum of 32 cordless handsets to access the system The handsets can either be twinned with stationary sets or they can act as independent sets Refer to Mobility Services by Region on page 259 lists the region profiles that can accommodate the DECT system The DECT system has a separate set of documentation describing the installation of the module radio base station and cordless handsets The Business Communications Manager 2 5 DECT Ins
243. r Sede ede kide 258 Mobility services by region 2 00 cee ene 259 Module availability by profile 00 0 cee ee 259 Trunk availability by region ios i oe eens Chae Sey eee 2 260 PRI line protocol supported by region scccscec rca ca deen aa eane 261 BRI and PRI line types DTM and BRI modules 262 Time date formats based on language 0 e eee eee eee 264 Region ORISUNS lt cccvctercadevectevere ice teat EEA DERREN 265 CTMs combined with 4X16 modules 00 000 eee eens 269 DSM combined with 2 DTMs and 2 ASMs 0000 ee eee 270 Three BRI modules two DSM 32s and 1 DECT module 271 Cross referencing ports and DNs 0 0000 273 P0937235 02 1 29 Preface This guide describes how to install initialize and maintain the hardware for the Business Communications Manager 2 5 system Information in these chapters explains e how to set up the system hardware e how to start and initialize the system hardware e how to troubleshoot and maintain the hardware All core system operational configuration is described in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide To use this guide you must e bea Nortel Networks installer with Business Communications Manager certification e know basic Nortel Networks terminology Symbols used in this guide This guide uses symbols to draw your attention to important information
244. r on hub board Screws attached to fa Figure 108 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 5 redundancy models Fan connectors Vi on hub board f Aa 7 Q Fan connector on hub board P0937235 02 1 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan 225 Replace the Fan into the Expansion Unit Follow these steps to replace the fan in the Business Communications Manager expansion unit Place the fan in the expansion unit so that the label faces the back wall of the unit Align the screw holes in the fan with the screw holes in the expansion unit and attach the fan Connect the fan power supply cable to the hub board Replace the cover a Q N Restore the unit to operation For details refer to Restarting the System on page 206 The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord This takes several minutes to complete Installation and Maintenance Guide 226 Chapter 18 Adding or Replacing a Cooling Fan P0937235 02 1 227 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply Business Communications Manager base units and expansion units can have standard or redundant power supplies This chapter describes e how to replace a standard power supply e how to upgrade from a standard power supply to a redundant power supply Business Communications Manager base unit only e how to replace the power supply module in a redundant power supp
245. r system Table 34 Cross referencing ports and DNs DN 221 DN 237 DN 253 DN 269 DN 285 DN 301 Port 201 Port 301 Port 401 Port 501 Port 601 Port 701 White Blue Blue White 28 White Green 3 Green White 30 White Slate 5 Slate White Red Orange Orange Red 34 Red Brown 9 Brown Red DN 223 Port 203 DN 225 Port 205 DN 227 Port 207 DN 229 Port 209 DN 239 Port 303 DN 241 Port 305 DN 245 Port 309 DN 255 Port 403 DN 257 Port 405 DN 261 Port 409 DN 271 Port 503 DN 273 Port 505 DN 277 Port 509 DN 287 Port 603 DN 289 Port 605 DN 293 Port 609 DN 303 Port 703 DN 305 Port 705 DN 243 DN 259 DN 275 DN 291 DN 307 Port 307 Port 407 Port 507 Port 607 Port 707 DN 309 Port 709 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 11 Installing Telephones and Peripherals 149 Table 34 Cross referencing ports and DNs Continued Black Blue DN 231 DN 247 DN 263 DN 279 DN 295 DN 311 Blue Black Port 211 Port 311 Port 411 Port 511 Port 611 Port 711 Black Green DN 249 DN 265 DN 281 DN 297 DN 313 Green Black Port 313 Port 413 Port 513 Port 613 Port 713 Black Slate DN 235 DN 251 DN 267 DN 283 DN 299 DN 315 Slate Black Port 215 Port 315 Port 415 Port 515 Port 615 Port 715 Installing an Emergency Telephone You can use the emergency telephone to make calls when there is no power to the Business Co
246. r them Initializing the Hard Disk The Business Communications Manager system is normally initialized at the factory However if you have to replace the hard drive in a Business Communications Manager base unit you must re initialize the Business Communications Manager After you replace the hard disk and the system has booted up perform the initialization as follows 1 Make sure the Status LED on the Business Communications Manager base unit is lit This LED indicates that the Business Communications Manager base unit is operating correctly Attach the base unit and a computer through the serial port as described in Setting Up the Null Modem Cable on page 132 Enter the terminal emulation program as described in Finding the Configuration Menus on page 133 Ifthe hard disk does not require initialization the main menu appears Refer to Figure 96 Figure 96 Initialization Menu screen Nortel Networks Business Communications Make a selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 1 Initialization Menu 2 System Configuration 3 Configuration Wizard 4 Media Services Card System ID 5 Command line 6 Reboot the system 7 Diagnostics 8 SSM Test X Exit BCH ID 2 5 Version 6 6 8 Current Profile 1 Installation and Maintenance Guide 214 Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard Disk Ifthe hard disk requires initialization the Platform Initialization Menu appears Refer to Figure 97 Figure 97 P
247. ranges of 0 C and 40 C 32 F and 95 F between 20 and 80 non condensing relative humidity enough space and strength to support the Business Communications Manager base unit minimum of 46 cm 18 in from the floor Note The installation area must be of sufficient height from the floor to prevent water gt damage Installation and Maintenance Guide 80 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit Electrical Requirements The following electrical requirements must be met e Power must be supplied from non switched unobstructed outlet within 1 5 m 5 ft of the Business Communications Manager base unit e The supplied power must be a dedicated 110 V 120 V ac nominal or 220 V 230 V ac nominal 50 60 Hz 15 A minimum service with a third wire safety ground The third wire safety ground provides shock protection and avoids electromagnetic interference Danger Risk of electric shock The safety of this product requires connection to an outlet with a third wire ground Use only with a three wire power cord and outlet Caution Check ground connections Ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metal water pipe system if present are connected together If these ground connections are not connected together contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority Do not try to make the connections yourself T
248. rdware entity characterized by its use as a communications component within a network network DN A number supplied by the ISDN network service provider for ISDN terminal equipment network interface card NIC This card is installed inside a computer so the computer can be physically connected to a network device such as the Business Communications Manager server On hold A setting that controls what external callers hear music tones or silence when you place the call on hold Program On hold under Feature settings in System programming overflow A setting in Routing Service that allows users to decide which path an outgoing call takes if all the lines used in a selected route are in use packet A packet is a unit of data that is routed between an origin and a destination Each packet is separately numbered and includes the Internet address of the destination Packet and datagram are similar in meaning A protocol similar to TCP the User Datagram Protocol UDP uses the term datagram page A feature you can use to make announcements over the Business Communications Manager system using the telephone speakers and or external speakers Page Time out A setting that controls how long a Page Announcement can last Assign the Page Time out under Feature settings in System programming Page zone An area in the office that receives internal page announcements that other areas of the office do not hear Assign telephone
249. receives higher priority than batch transfers Wide Area Network WAN A collection of computers or Business Communications Managers connected or networked to each other over long distances normally using common carrier facilities Installation and Maintenance Guide 290 Glossary P0937235 02 1 291 Index Numbers 10 100 Base T network interface card 134 16 wire pairs 141 2 6 channel split 75 25 pair cable amphenol connector cable 82 141 wiring guides 137 4X16 channel requirements 77 combination module station component 60 description of module 39 DIP switch settings 96 99 108 DS30 channel hierarchy 96 hardware description 61 station wiring chart 142 trunk wiring 139 wiring chart 139 8 pair wiring for ASM 143 A ac outlet 116 118 122 accessories ATA2 147 CAP 148 ACD Call Center 46 Professional Call Center 46 adding new extensions 73 address default IP address 130 default subnet mask 125 130 agents adding 45 alternate phone number 130 American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers Music on Hold licence 6 amphenol connector 60 61 62 141 analog communication devices 183 analog device measurement from CO 185 analog device measurement to CO 185 analog equipment ATA2 147 analog extensions 73 analog loop 80 analog loop resistance ATA2 190 analog port termination 185 analog station media bay module ASM8 62 analog station modules 60 analog telepho
250. rical storm Always turn off the base station power before connecting the coaxial cable of an outdoor antenna Always install the lightning surge protector at the cable entry point into the building Connect the lightning surge protector to ground before you connect the coaxial cable Installing Antennas United States of America The following points cover special information about installations in the United States of America The outdoor antenna connectors on the base station are special proprietary BNC connectors Antennas are supplied with cables attached and terminated with special proprietary BNC plugs to join with the connector on the base station Cables are not supplied with outdoor antennas Installation and Maintenance Guide 172 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Before You Install an Outdoor Antenna USA Before you install an outdoor antenna check the following points e Locate the antenna on the external wall of the building e Keep the outdoor antenna as close as possible to the base station connected to it The base station must always be inside the building The recommended installation height for the antenna is 13 to 16 ft above ground e Always install a lightning surge protector between an outdoor antenna and a base station Refer to Figure 66 Figure 66 Installed antenna and lightning surge protectors USA 1 Antenna Mounting bracket Wall Back to back proprietary B
251. right when you choose the side to install the rack mounting brackets on 2 Fasten the bracket to the base unit using the screws provided with the bracket Refer to Figure 30 Caution Use only the screws supplied with the rack mounting brackets Do not replace screws Other screws can damage the Business Communications Manager base unit Figure 30 Attaching the mounting brackets to the base unit cf Installation and Maintenance Guide 86 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit Install the 2 cm 3 4 in plywood backboard on the wall Insert two 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws in the backboard The screws must be 34 5 cm 13 5 in apart and level Do not tighten the screws heads against the backboard Leave approximately 0 5 cm 0 25 in of the screw out of the backboard Note Position the screws to leave enough space beside the Business Communications Manager base unit 23 cm or 9 in to insert and remove the media bay modules 5 Hang the base unit on the two screws using the outer two slotted holes Make sure the base unit is level the mounting brackets are against the wall and the front cover is facing left or right Refer to Figure 31 Figure 31 Mount the Business Communications Manager base unit on the wall Mounting brackets we ete oo als o o ate oo ots Front cover ETE
252. rks Multimedia Call Center requires keycode allows call agents and users to interact through either or both a telephone connection and an IP connection This allows the conversation to occur over the voice connection or through text chatting Further this application allows exchange and viewing of web pages and allows the attendant to show the client screen captures Personal Call Manager User Guide Personal Call Manager a TAPI based application provides a graphical interface that allows you to use your computer to manage your calls and address book while still using your telephone for voice communication Installation and Maintenance Guide 48 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Data Features The Business Communications Manager also offers the following data features These features are described and configured in the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide Integrated QoS Routing controls the router interface between the Business Communications Manager system and the local area network wide area network and internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Business Communications Manager 2 5 provides DHCP service to branch office clients This service dynamically assigns IP addresses to branch office PCs so you do not manually assign an IP address to each PC The Business Communications Manager can also be set to use this application as a relay agent to an external DHCP
253. rning The BRI must only be connected to an NT1 provided by the service provider The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV to Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV barrier Figure 53 BRIRJ45 wiring array BRI connector coool J ol oll o Pin connection 3 TX 4 RX TL RJA5 sockets 4 RX 87654321 yee 5 RX 3 Insert the connector into the jack on the module Refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide for steps about changing the default settings for each line loop 4 You can now use the Unified Manager to configure the lines or sets associated with the module Refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide P0937235 02 1 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules 141 Wiring Media Bay Modules to Internal Connections After you have the trunk modules wired you can install the wiring to the station modules These are the modules which connect to the internal telephone sets All station module wiring uses 25 pair cable with a female amphenol connector at the module end Note DSM 32 modules require two 25 pair cables gt Follow these steps to connect the wiring for the DSM 16 DSM 32 ASM 8 or 4X16 modules 1 Wire 16 wire pairs from the amphenol connector to the local connecting blocks so they connect to the 16 station sets you want connected to this module Use Table 31 and Figure 54 on page
254. rocessing Hardware 251 Installing the New Battery This section describes how to replace the clock calendar battery into the base unit A Warning There is a danger of explosion if you do not replace the battery correctly You must replace the battery with a CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery The positive side of the battery must face up The battery must sit securely in the battery socket A O N a Ensure you have the positive side of the battery facing up when you position it in the socket Push down until the battery snaps into the socket Replace the cover Restore the unit to operation For details refer to Restarting the System on page 206 Installation and Maintenance Guide 252 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware P0937235 02 1 Chapter 21 Replacing Telephones 253 Chapter 21 Replacing Telephones When the Business Communications Manager system is on you can replace a telephone with a new one and the new set will pick up the current programming if it is the same model as the set that was removed A new telephone is one that was not previously in service within the system For a description of the telephones that can be used on the Business Communications Manager system refer to Telephones and Adapters on page 65 For information on installing and replacing the i2004 telephone refer to the IP Telephone Configuration Guide Determining the Status of a Te
255. rstar station module amphenol cable directly to a DSM you do not have to change any settings to maintain the DN assignments Table 33 compares the designated extension numbers on the Norstar and on the Business Communications Manager Table 33 Extension comparison chart DS30 channel 2 FEM port 1 Norstar 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 BCM 225 226 227 228 221 222 223 224 233 234 235 236 229 230 231 232 DS30 channel 3 FEM port 2 Norstar 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 BCM 241 242 243 244 237 238 239 240 249 250 251 252 245 246 247 248 DS30 channel 4 FEM port 3 Norstar 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 BCM 257 258 259 260 253 254 255 256 265 266 267 268 261 262 263 264 Installation and Maintenance Guide 146 Chapter 10 Wiring the Modules Table 33 Extension comparison chart DS30 channel 6 FEM port 5 Norstar 285 286 287 288 290 291 292 293 294 296 297 298 299 300 BCM 289 290 291 292 286 287 288 297 298 300 293 294 295 296 P0937235 02 1 147 Chapter 11 I
256. rtable telephones are not assigned extension numbers The range of portable extensions available for wireless registration is 061 to 118 For more information about registering and programming Companion portables see the Business Communications Manager 2 5 Programming Operations Guide Restarting the System If you added a base station that requires a software update the system begins downloading the software to the base station The display shows BS 1 Dload Start 1 Press CLEAR to clear the message When the base station software finishes downloading the BS 1 Dload Done appears 2 Press CLEAR to clear the message Some base stations do not power up at the same time and this message repeats at the beginning of each download In the United States the display shows one of the messages listed in Table 44 after restarting Table 44 UTAM messages UTAM code req d System logical identifier LID information UTAM test failed See alarm codes in the Windows NT event log Warning A loss of unlicensed transition and management for microwave UTAM A information occurs when upgrading US Business Communications Manager systems You need UTAM Recovery Codes P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 171 Installing External Antennas and Lightning Surge Protection You can use external antennas to provide a broad range for your Companion system Ensure that any external installations comply with l
257. s 82 restart hardware 206 software 207 restrictions antenna installation 175 return loss 184 returning hard disk for repair 211 RF interference 3 RG 58 U coaxial cable 175 RG 58A U coaxial cables 171 ring 193 194 195 196 ring indicator 132 ringer equivalence number 7 183 Ringer Equivalence Number REN 8 ringer auxiliary 193 ringing signal 183 RJ11 jacks 58 61 139 169 RJ45 jack 126 128 139 RJ48C jack 40 59 139 router 130 router interface QoS Routing 48 routing network 48 RPI backup power requirements 157 cabling distance 161 clearance 158 Companion base station components 160 connecting 161 input connectors 162 input wiring 163 installation 157 maximum cable 161 mounting 158 opening 159 output connectors 162 overheating 158 power supply 158 requirements 158 RPI 16 BIX UL 158 RPI 16 BIX wiring chart 165 RPI 8 BIX UL 158 RPI 8 BIX wiring chart 163 turn off before connecting 168 ventilation 158 wiring 161 input connections 162 output connections 162 wiring charts 163 rubber foot attaching 87 92 S safety extra low voltage SELV barrier 140 external equipment 41 safety instructions 9 SAPS 80 security code keycode 136 selecting media bay modules 71 serial data in out 132 service order code SOC 5 service provider disable internal CSU trunk wiring 139 sets per line 8 shock warning 209 shutdown protocol 126 remove cables 204 shock warning 209 signal ground 128 1
258. s are matched VPN Virtual Private Networks Business Communications Manager 2 5 uses the PPTP point to point tunneling protocol and IPSec IP security tunneling protocols to create secure extranets These secure extranets provide safe transport of data to and from the Business Communications Manager using the public data network PDN P0937235 02 1 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager 49 Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit The Business Communications Manager expansion unit houses a maximum of six additional media bay modules A Category 5 patch cable which comes with the expansion unit connects the expansion unit with the Business Communications Manager base unit through DS256 connectors The Category 5 patch cable must be 5 m 16 ft long The cable connects into a DS256 port on the MSC of the Business Communications Manager base unit and into a DS256 port on the center panel of the expansion unit Refer to Figure 9 Note The number of modules that actually can be installed is determined by the number of DS30 channels required by the modules and the number of channels available Refer to Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit on page 79 Figure 9 DS256 connector on base unit and expansion unit
259. s handsets a maximum of 32 page 259 FEM connects a maximum of six Norstar expansion The switches on the FEM are used to Fiber Expansion modules turn fiber ports on and off The FEM Media Bay Module does not work correctly if you set these i switches using the rules used for other media bay modules DECT Media Bay Module region specific application The DECT media bay module has eight RJ45 jacks The RJ45 jacks connect to base stations deployed around the coverage area Each DECT module supports four ISDN lines thus allowing a maximum of eight simultaneous call paths back to the Business Communications Manager Figure 21 shows a front view of the module As well as a Power and Status LED the DECT module has LEDs that indicate the Run state and base station power state Figure 21 DECT faceplate with eight RJ45 connectors Each RJ45 jack can connect to one base station Status LED Run LED Base station power LED Installation and Maintenance Guide 64 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware DECT DIP Switches Figure 22 shows the location of the DIP switches on the DECT module Refer to Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules on page 115 for the switch settings required for the module Figure 22 DECT DIP switches Rear view Fiber Expansion Media Bay Module The Fiber Expansion media bay module FEM connects a maximum of six Norstar expansion modules to
260. s of fan holes are uncovered Base units delivered with a single fan have one of the sets of fan holes covered with a label Version 2 0 systems have only one set of fan holes and the redundant fan is piggy backed on to the existing fan Figure 114 Remove the power supply screws Remove these power supply screws 8 Remove the power supply from the chassis 9 Remove the knockout plate from the back of the Business Communications Manager base unit Refer to Figure 115 Figure 115 Remove the knockout Remove this bracket to accommodate redundant power supply P0937235 02 1 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply 233 Installing the Redundant Power Supply After you have prepared the Business Communications Manager base unit to accommodate the redundant power supply follow these steps to insert the housing 1 Remove the power supply modules from the redundant power supply housing a Check the rocker switch on the left side of the module and ensure that it is in the off position b Grasp the handle and pull the tab beside the rocker switch towards the handle c Pull the module out of the housing 2 Position the redundant power supply housing in the Business Communications Manager base unit Align the screw holes in the redundant power supply with the screw holes in the base unit Attach the redundant power supply housing to th
261. s of the module Refer to Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules on page 115 3 Install the modules into the Business Communications Manager base unit or expansion unit Refer to Chapter 9 Starting the System on page 121 P0937235 02 1 79 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit This chapter describes how to install the Business Communications Manager base unit Preparation Checklist Before you install the base unit complete the following actions Determine the location for the Business Communications Manager base unit telephones and other equipment based on spacing and electrical requirements For more information about spacing and electrical requirements refer to the Environment Checklist on page 79 and the Electrical Requirements on page 80 Order the required trunks from the central office Check that all of the media bay modules are installed in the Business Communications Manager base unit Ensure that you have all the equipment and supplies you require to install the system Environment Checklist The installation area must be minimum of 4 m 13 ft from equipment such as photocopiers electrical motors and other equipment that produces electromagnetic radio frequency and electrostatic interference within 1 5 m 5 ft of a three wire grounded electrical outlet clean free of traffic and excess dust dry and well ventilated within the temperature
262. s should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician P0937235 02 1 Network Connection Canada and US Table 1 Interface harmonized standards Interface Harmonized Standard Description CTM Industry Canada CS03 Analog terminal device FCC Part 68 DTM Industry Canada CS03 T1 and Primary Rate ISDN FCC Part 68 BRIM Industry Canada CS03 Basic Rate ISDN FCC Part 68 WAN Industry Canada CS03 T1 FCC Part 68 Hearing Aid Compatibility Business Communications Manager telephones are hearing aid compatible as defined in Section 68 316 of Part 68 FCC Rules Electromagnetic Compatibility Business Communications Manager equipment meets all FCC Part 15 Class A radiated and conducted emissions requirements Business Communications Manager does not exceed the Class A limits for radiated and conducted emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of Industry Canada Telephone Company Registration It is usually not necessary to call the telecommunications company with information on the equipment before connecting the Business Communications Manager system to the telephone network If the telecommunications company requires this information provide the following e telephone number s to which the system will be connected e FCC registration number on label affixed to Business Co
263. s to page zones under Capabilities in System DNs programming Parallel port A port that transfers data through multiple wires Parallel ports normally use a 25 pin interface that transmits and receives data using a separate data line for every bit Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI Slot Socket on the Business Communications Manager main printed circuit board that connects to the Business Communications Manager cards P0937235 02 1 Glossary 285 Personal Speed Dial Two digit codes 71 94 that can be programmed on the set to dial external telephone numbers You can access Personal Speed dial numbers only at the telephone on which they are programmed Pin 1 An indicator on the first pin on an electronic component You use this indicator to help you correctly align the component when attaching or installing it Port A connector on the Business Communications Manager that allows data exchange with other devices such as a printer or mouse portable telephone Typically a handset containing keypad receiver and transmitter that communications using a radio link to a base station connected to the Business Communications Manager Examples Companion DECT Primary Rate Interface PRI An ISDN interface that uses 23 B channels and a D channel 23B D Prime line The line the system selects for your telephone when you lift the receiver press the Handsfree Mute button or use an external dialing feature Assign a Pr
264. se switch settings To assign these DNs 269 276 277 284 285 292 293 300 301 308 309 316 Custom DN range P0937235 02 1 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 111 DSM Switch Settings There are two types of DSMs DSM 16s have 16 lines These modules require a full DS30 channel each The offset is always set to 0 DSM32s have 32 lines These modules require two full consecutive DS30 channel numbers You set the first channel on the DIP switches The system assigns the next channel Table 21 shows the switch settings for each DS30 channel and the dialing numbers DNs assigned to each DS30 channel Note that Companion sets can only be assigned on DS30 channel 6 and 7 and the handsets have a different set of default DNs than the digital sets Table 21 DSM 16 and DSM 32 switch settings see Enter these switch settings Hees To assign these DNs Companion Custom DN 2 on on on omn on onf 721 236 on on on on on 221 252 3 237 252 237 268 N A 4 253 268 ae 5 269 284 a 28930 6 285 300 E 565 596 N on on on on 301 316 te NJA for M E OS S o The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 channel split you cannot use DS30 channel 7 for th
265. sets C3050 e battery packs NiCad 600 mAh e battery packs NiCad 600 mAh e high capacity battery charger e high capacity battery charger e UTAM software keycode for base station activation Optional Companion Equipment e clip holster e leather glove e rugged protector e headset earbud battery not included e headset over the head battery not included DECT Equipment If you are installing a DECT system check that you have the following hardware e DECT module e base station kit e handsets and rechargers Equipment for Installing the Base Unit For the installation you need the following equipment e rack mounting bracket Note Wall mounting brackets can be ordered separately gt e four rubber feet e Phillips screwdriver 2 e flat blade screwdriver e pliers e antistatic grounding strap e connecting tool e surge protector recommended e cables 25 pair cable with amphenol connectors P0937235 02 1 Chapter 5 Installing the Business Communications Manager Base Unit 83 Installing the Server in a Rack The Business Communications Manager base unit fits into a standard 19 inch equipment rack You can install the base unit in the same rack as your other networking and telecommunications equipment Caution When installing the Business Communications Manager base unit in a rack do not stack units directly on top of one another in the rack Fasten each unit to the rack with th
266. shows what the board looks like from inside the Business Communications Manager server When installing new equipment that connects to this board ensure that the connector for that LED is properly seated Figure 84 SSM board connections MO MAIN monitoring cable M11 00000 O00000 00000 00000 0000000 0000000 o TL 11111 oo000000 ooooo0000 Mother board Redundant power supply Mother board J10 Board power Redundant primary fans CPU fan g Sess Gael Ba J7 J6 Remote temperature sensor E Note Chassis has all PCI cards removed for clarity SSM board P0937235 02 1 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting 199 Figure 85 shows what the LEDs look like on the outside of the base unit The labels in the illustration indicate which part of the hardware each LED supports Figure 85 LED locations on the face of the base unit oO O NO NTR Forks a ocooo 8 8 O O O eol o a I Operation LEDs F882 PZ AAMAL G O ri 2 of oO ness Communicktions Manayer 2 l 000 i o C Jem 9 oN O O I oO r mjm m m I I Power Disk Status I PCI Device PCI pevice Temperature Fan O 0 Gea Devies PCI Dev
267. ss Communications Manager system provides private network and telephony management to small to medium sized businesses With this system you can create a telephony system that suits your special business requirements This compact system allows you to set up access to the public network as well as to create your own internal network between remote sites over dedicated central office CO lines or through a LAN or WAN connection where you can use voice over IP VoIP trunks to route both data and voice traffic You control your own setup from your desktop using the Unified Manager and CallPilot applications The system supports a variety of Nortel Networks telephones with many user features that can be programmed either by the system manager or by the users at their sets CallPilot voice mail and call attendant applications are part of the basic Business Communications Manager system However if you require more extensive coverage such as more mail boxes additional applications are easily activated using software keycodes Business Communications Manager System Components The Business Communications Manager system includes software and hardware components that provide data networking telephony service and voice messaging and service applications Figure 1 provides an overview of the core Business Communications Manager system The page locations where the information about each part is discussed are also indicated Figure 1 Business Co
268. t To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the voice messaging device 1 Establish a connection to the 1 mW 1 kHz CO service line with a single line telephone attached to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Ensure that the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms a_ Replace the single line telephone with the test set b Use RECEIVE 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set Ensure that the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the single line telephone or the line drops Remove the single line telephone Measure the 1 kHz tone at the far end of the analog port which is where the analog loop ends and where the voice messaging device connects Note The tone must be greater than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable gt For Analog Device to CO Measurement To measure the insertion loss from the voice messaging device to the CO 1 Establish a connection to a silent termination on the CO service line with a single line telephone attached to the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 Make sure the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms by e replacing the single line telephone with the test set e using TRANSMIT 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set Make sure the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the single line telephone or the line drops Remove the single line telephone Introduce a 1 kHz tone into the analog line at 10 dBm and meas
269. t Do not replace screws Other screws can damage the Business Communications Manager expansion unit 7 Align the slots on the wall mounting bracket over the screws 8 Push the unit against the wall and slide it down so the slots rest on the screws 9 Tighten the two screws to the wall mounting bracket Installing the Expansion Unit on a Flat Surface You can install the Business Communications Manager expansion unit on any flat surface that can support the weight of the unit and which is within 5 m 16 ft of the Business Communications Manager base unit 1 Attach the supplied rubber feet to the corners of the bottom of the expansion unit Position the expansion unit on the table or shelf Ensure that you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables and media bay modules Connecting the Expansion Unit to the Base Unit After the expansion unit has been installed in the desired location use the supplied DS256 cable to connect it to the Business Communications Manager base unit 1 Plug one end of the cable into the DS256 connector on the Business Communications Manager expansion unit Refer to Figure 35 Figure 35 DS256 connector on the expansion unit O NOR TRhonns Q O oM E E EA oof lM OG O
270. t E S eS Trunk Availability by Region Different countries have different available trunk types Table 56 provides a cross reference between regions and available trunks types Table 57 Trunk availability by region Country PRI specific ETSI 30 channels analog Region BRI S T 2 4 BRI U2 4 NA 23 channels Analog DID E amp M CLASS trunk card Australia v v v CALA v v v v v v Caribbean v y v y v v Denmark y v France v s v Germany v v4 v Global v s v v Holland s v v Hong Kong v v v s v Italy v s North American v v s v v v Norway v s PRC v y v v P0937235 02 1 System Region Attributes 261 Table 57 Trunk availability by region Continued Country PRI specific ETSI 30 channels analog Region BRI S T 2 4 BRI U2 4 NA 23channels Analog DID E amp M CLASS trunk card Spain v s Sweden v v Switzerland v s Taiwan v v s v v United Kingdom v v v Table 58 PRI line protocol supported by region Region BRI T side BRIS side PRI T1 Australia ISDN ETSI 300 403 ISDN ETSI 300 102 DASS2 DPNSS MCDN ISDN ETSI 300 403 ETSI QSIG 300 239 Brazil ISDN ETSI 300 403 ISDN ETSI 300 102 ETSI QSIG 300 239 CALA ETSI QSIG 300 239 ISDN ETSI 300 403 MCDN Caribbean NI 2 NI 2 NI 2 Loop North American 4ESS E amp M DMS100 DID DMS250 Ground MCDN Fixed trunk types Hong Ko
271. t 206 temperature LED fan 218 expansion unitt power supply switch 122 extensions DIP switch settings 101 number required 73 portable telephones 170 see also DNs external antennas 178 external clock 127 128 129 external devices base unit ports 43 external equipment safety warning 41 external line isolation units LIU MSC jacks 41 external loudspeakers 194 external music source connections 196 installation 195 programming 196 specifications 195 volume 196 external paging amplifier 42 connecting 194 installing 194 requirements 194 F faceplate see coverplate facility interface code FIC 5 fan cable adapter 223 cables 220 label 222 P0937235 02 1 Index 297 LEDs 218 positioning blades 222 process map 217 removing 218 removing connectors 220 fax ASM station module 62 auxiliary jack 58 compatibility 190 connecting an ATA2 186 Fax Mail 46 Fax Messaging 46 Fax On Demand 46 Fax Overflow 46 FCC certification antennas 171 compliant cord and plug 7 device compliance 7 electromagnetic compatibility 5 EMI and EMC 9 hearing aid compatible 5 network standards 5 Public Switched Telephone Network 7 registration 4 registration number 5 registration number location 7 REN on label 8 RF interference 3 telecommunications company rights 6 features system 45 Federal Communications Commission see FCC FEM connecting to an existing system 74 description 40 DIP switch settings 113 DS30 channel requiremen
272. tal Station media bay module DSM 16 supports 16 digital telephones e Digital Station media bay module DSM 32 supports 32 digital telephones through two amphenol connectors e 4X16 supports 16 digital telephones and does not require a separate trunk module Refer to 4X16 Media Bay Module on page 61 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware 61 Figure 18 Faceplates of DSM 16 and DSM 32 Power LED Status LED Amphenol connector Power LED Status LED Amphenol connectors 4X16 Media Bay Module North American systems only The 4X16 provides both analog trunk connections and connections to digital telephones The module is a combination of a CTM media bay module with four analog lines and a DSM 16 digital telephone media bay module Each of the four ports supports Caller ID and disconnect supervision An auxiliary port beside Line 1 allows you to use an analog telephony device such as a modem fax or telephone to share the trunk Figure 19 shows a diagram of the 4X16 The 4X16 has one amphenol connector and five RJ11 connectors on the faceplate For details on the 4X16 wiring refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 183 Figure 19 Faceplate of 4X16 module LEDS connectors and jacks DSM16 amphenol connector Power LED Status LED Line 1 Aux Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 62 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware Analog Sta
273. tallation and Maintenance Guide describes e how to install the module and the base stations e how to run the DECT Wizards to set up the module and make it ready for subscribing the handsets e how to subscribe the handsets Installation and Maintenance Guide 152 Chapter 11 Installing Telephones and Peripherals Recording Installed Sets Companion sets default to DNs in the 565 to 596 DN range and use the DN type NA Portable DECT sets are ISDN sets and use the DN range of 597 to 624 with DN type ISDN and DECT If you require more than 28 DECT handsets use DNs from the NA Portable range and change the DN type to ISDN and DECT The Unified Manager provides a DECT Wizard that helps you coordinate the handset DNs between the Business Communications Manager and the DECT module Refer to the DECT documentation for details about using the Wizard Note On systems upgraded from 2 0 to 2 5 with three digit DNs starting at DN 221 DECT handsets default to the 501 to 532 DN range These numbers are based on systems with three digit DNs that use the default DN of 221 If you change either of those settings on your system adjust the numbering accordingly Use Table 36 on page 153 to record the DNs for your Companion or DECT handsets P0937235 02 1 Chapter 11 Installing Telephones and Peripherals 153 Table 36 Wireless DNs
274. tdown Click the Yes button Wait until the Status changes to Complete It is safe to turn off the system 10 Click the Done button 11 Quit the web browser Shutting Down the System Hardware After the system has gracefully exited from the software you can shut down the hardware Warning You must remove all of the connections to the Business Communications Manager base unit before you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system Follow these steps in order to ensure a safe shutdown of the system 1 Remove the cables from the front of the Business Communications Manager server and expansion cabinet if there is one This includes the data connections on the MSC Mark the cables so you can ensure they get reconnected correctly Disconnect the base unit and expansion unit power cords from the ac outlet Q Warning You must disconnect power from the Business Communications Manager base unit after you have performed a Unified Manager shutdown The Business Communications Manager base unit cannot start operating again until after power has been disconnected and then reconnected P0937235 02 1 Chapter 16 Preparing Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades 205 3 Ensure you have room to access the part you are working on Remove the server from the rack if necessary Removing the Top Cover from the Unit You must remove the top cover to access any of
275. te 9 After the cable is wired correctly connect the RPI power cord to the ac outlet 10 Label each RPI P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 161 Wiring the and Connecting the RPI The maximum two way DC loop resistance for power pairs including interconnections for each base station is 75 ohms You need one or two power pairs between the RPI and the base station The number of power pairs depends on the wire size of the power pair and the distance between the base station and the RPI Caution Do not run unprotected power cables outdoors The maximum cable distances allowed between the RPI and the base station depend on the size of wire you use Refer to Table 38 Table 38 Cable distances 0 6 mm 22 AWG 800 m 2 500 ft 1200 m 4 000 ft 0 5 mm 24 AWG 500 m 1 500 ft 1000 m 3 000 ft Caution When you use two power pairs connect both pairs with the same polarity Connecting the RPI Connect the power pairs to the correct connectors Figure 61 shows the location of the input and output connectors on the RPI connector printed circuit board Figure 61 RPI connector printed circuit board 0B1X1 0B1X2 0B1X3 0B1X4 0B1X9 0B1X10 0B1X11 0B1X12 m PS Mi Mmm 0B1X9 0B1X13 0B1X14 0B1X15 ES m Mi
276. tector for every outdoor antenna installed Outdoor Requirements Before you install the antenna ensure that your plan meets the following requirements e Ifyou are installing an outdoor antenna on a metal surface greater than 18 cm 7 in in diameter position the antenna perpendicular to the surface e When running the coaxial cable inside or outside be careful not to damage the cable which affects its performance The minimum recommended bending radius is 20 mm 0 8 in e Always ensure that the antenna is clear of any adjacent obstruction or metal objects If you use more than one outdoor antenna at a cell center separate the antennas at by least 0 5 m 20 in to avoid radio interference problems e Use RG 58 U coaxial cables to connect the antennas to the base stations Caution Use only passive antennas to connect to the Companion base stations The coaxial cable you use to connect the external antenna to a Companion base station must have an impedance of 50 ohms Installation and Maintenance Guide 176 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems Installing an Indoor Directional Antenna The indoor directional antenna has a backplate that allows for easy installation on a wall The antenna is installed half way between the floor and the ceiling For some applications for example a stairwell you can install the antenna on the ceiling 1 Use four screws to install the antenna Refer to Figure 69 Figure
277. ted profiles only requires a full DS30 channel P0937235 02 1 Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System 73 2 Use the number of lines and the number of lines per module to determine how many modules you need For example e If you require 24 T1 digital lines you need one DTM because a single DTM can handle 24 T1 lines e If you require two analog lines and 24 T1 digital lines you need one CTM and one DTM Note Although the DTM supports several types of digital lines you cannot connect different types of lines to the same DTM You can add a maximum of three DTMs to your Business Communications Manager system Tip The Business Communications Manager base unit can hold three media bay modules If you require more than three modules a Business Communications expansion unit can support a maximum of six additional modules Selecting the Station Media Bay Modules The number and type of telephones and related equipment you have determines which station media bay modules you require 1 In Table 9 record the number of each type of extension you have e Digital extensions are digital or IP telephones For a list of the telephones that can be used with the Business Communications Manager system refer to Telephones and Adapters on page 65 e Analog extensions include single line telephones fax machines and modems Note If you are adding any extensions in the near future inclu
278. tem is powered up before connecting this cable EY To connect the modem card insert a PSTN line into the Line jack on the modem card ann RJ45 jack For information about the location of the modem card refer to Figure 46 on page 126 Note Not all systems are equipped with a modem card Table 27 shows the wire connections for a RS 422 EIA 530 cable Table 27 RS 422 ElA 530 adapter cable 1 Protective Ground 1 14 Transmit Data B 14 2 Transmit Data A 2 15 Transmit Clock A 15 3 Receive Data A 3 16 Receive Data B 16 4 Request to Send A 4 17 Receive Clock A 17 5 Clear to Send A 5 18 18 6 Data Set Ready A 6 19 Request To Send B 19 7 Signal Ground 7 20 Data Terminal Ready A 20 8 Data Carrier Detect A 8 21 21 9 Receive Clock B 9 22 Data Set Ready B 22 10 Data Carrier Detect B 10 23 Data Terminal Ready B 23 11 External Clock B 11 24 External Clock A 24 12 Transmit Clock B 12 25 25 13 Clear To Send B 13 26 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 9 Starting the System 129 Table 28 shows the wire connections for a V 35 adapter cable Table 28 V 35 Adapter Cable Protective Ground Transmit Clock A Y ol 3 Receive Data A R Receive Clock A V N 5 Clear to Send D mg o 7 Signal Ground B 1 N 9 Receive Clock B X ow 11 External Clock B Ww N ol 13 Table 29 shows
279. teps describe the process for removing PECs from a Business Communications Manager base unit MSC Ensure you have a current data backup of your system 2 Shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting Down the System Software on page 204 Otherwise skip to step 2 3 Set up the server for maintenance as described in Shutting Down the System Hardware on page 204 4 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Grasp the top edge of the PEC you want to remove and pull upward Refer to Figure 128 Figure 128 Removing or replacing a PEC P0937235 02 1 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware 245 Installing a PEC When you replace or add PECs ensure you have followed the directions for shutting down the system from the previous section Also ensure you have a current data backup of your system i Warning Possible data loss Ensure that you do not touch the PEC casing to any of the components on the MSC This may cause shorting top occur which can erase memory or cause a loss of telephony programming If this occurs complete the installation of the PEC and then restore the data from your backup medium Follow these steps to correctly install a PEC 1 Decide which slot you are going to install the PEC into on the MSC board 2 Line the card up between the rails of the slot 3 Carefully p
280. that came with the bracket Using other screws can damage the equipment Note Rack mount bracket The expansion unit rack mount bracket has an additional set of holes that allows you to install the brackets so that the expansion unit sits flush with the base unit in an equipment rack where space is limited Attaching the Expansion Unit to the Rack The mounting brackets you attached to the expansion unit correspond with mounting holes located on the equipment rack Note You must supply your own screws to attach the expansion unit to the rack gt 1 Determine the location in the rack you want to install the Business Communications Manager expansion unit 2 Position the expansion unit in the rack Refer to Figure 33 3 Align the holes in the rack mounting bracket with the holes in the rails 4 Fasten the rack mounting brackets to the equipment rack using four screws Figure 33 Fasten the expansion unit to the equipment rack O0O000000 0 00 OX ie o o QoO0o00 0 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 6 Installing the Business Communications Manager Expansion Unit 91 Installing the Expansion Unit on the Wall You must install the Business Communications Manager expansion unit must be installed close enough to the base unit that the 5 m 16 ft cable between the expansion unit and the Business Communications Manager base unit can be connected without stress on the cable
281. the Business Communications Manager system These connections provide a quick way to upgrade a Norstar system to a Business Communications Manager system The front bezel of the FEM has six connectors These connections are made using fiber cables between the FEM module and the Norstar expansion modules Beside each connector an LED lights when the fiber port is enabled The module has port status LEDs beside each port as well as the usual power and status LEDs Figure 23 shows the front of the FEM module Each port that is turned on consumes one DS30 channel Figure 23 FEM LEDs Port 4 Power LED Status LED Port 1 Port 5 Port 2 Port 6 Port 3 Front view P0937235 02 1 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware 65 Telephones and Adapters The following telephones and adapters can be used with the Business Communications Manager system Business Series Terminal T7100 one memory button without indicator Business Series Terminal T7316 two line display buttons 16 memory buttons with indicators eight memory buttons without indicators one line display one memory button without indicator Norstar M7100N UK and Australia only same features Norstar M7000 International only four memory buttons without display or indicators two line display with three display buttons 10 with indicators buttons without indicators Norstar M7310N UK Australia only
282. the ac outlets Note The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord System startup takes several minutes to complete 2 Connect the cables to the proper outlets on the media bay modules and the MSC on the server Caution DECT modules Plug the base station RJ45 cables into the DECT module one at a time Ensure each base station begins the startup sequence before plugging in the next module 3 Check that the LEDs on the modules are on and static Refer to Checking System Power and Status on page 123 for a detailed description of the LED states Test existing functions to confirm their operation Configure the module Refer to the Business Communications Manager Programming Operations Guide for details P0937235 02 1 Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules 119 Replacing Media Bay Modules When media bay modules require replacement follow the steps in this section want to replace a module with a different type of module you must treat it as a new installation Refer to Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings on page 95 and review Figure 39 on page 100 to ensure the new module does not overrun any lines already assigned to other modules Warning This section describes replacing a module with the same type of module If you Figure 43 Overview of module replacement process Module failure Set DIP switches Disconnect
283. the internal components of the Business Communications Manager base unit 1 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 2 Remove the two screws from the cover at the back of the unit 3 Lift the back of the cover and slide it back and up Refer to Figure 89 Figure 89 Remove the top cover Lift cover at A rear of i server i Installation and Maintenance Guide 206 Chapter 16 Preparing Hardware for Maintenance or Upgrades Removing the Front Bezel The front bezel is a plastic cover installed on the front of the Business Communications Manager base unit You must remove the bezel to add or remove the Business Communications Manager cards or the media bay modules Refer to Figure 90 1 To remove the front bezels Base unit Grasp the edge of the front bezel and pull it forward Expansion unit Push against the bottom of the bezel and then pull the bezel out from the top Figure 90 Removing the front bezel Grasp the edge of the front bezel and pull it forward 000000 00 Business Communications Manager base unit Business Communications Manager expansion unit o olf GA A Cy o obd GA GA EA ty 000 000 000 000 od
284. ther VoIP or PBX lines Nortel Networks i2050 Software Phone turns your PC into a telephone interface which provides standard telephony operating features such as Voice Mail Caller ID and multiple telephone lines or line appearances The features available to the application depend on what the connected system server provides This application requires Windows 2000 a full duplex sound card and a computer telephony headset VoIP Gateway requires keycode converts the voice in a call into a packet format and sends the call using an intranet trunk With Business Communications Manage rVoIP Gateway you can make calls over any intranet connected to the Business Communications Manager system LAN CTE Configuration Guide LAN CTE introduced in 2 5 to replace TSP requires keycode provides an interface between a Personal Computer PC a telephone and the Business Communications Manager server that allows third party software to function on PCs on the same network as the BCM This allows customized solutions for such applications as hotel motel packages or text messaging programs TSP version 2 0 systems only requires keycode supplies the interface between the Business Communications Manager system and Microsoft TAPI This interface allows you to useTAPI applications on the Business Communications Manager system Multimedia Call Center Setup and Operation Guide and Multimedia Call Center Web Developers Guide Nortel Netwo
285. ting to a business The three components of this application create a system that communicates with the Business Communications Manager provides call management options and reports how incoming calls are handled within a business Call Center Agent User Guide and Call Center Supervisor User Guide Nortel Networks Call Center Agents requires keycode allows the addition of a specific number of call center agents to your system Comes in versions for one four eight 16 32 and 64 seat authorization codes Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide Installation and Maintenance Guide 46 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Nortel Networks Call Center requires keycode this Automatic Call Distribution ACD system provides tools for handling incoming calls to an agent network The application also provides administration supervision and reporting tools Nortel Networks Professional Call Center upgrade requires keycode this is an expanded version of the basic Call Center application e Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Nortel Networks Call Center Reporting requires keycode monitors the statistics of a call center This application is also compatible with IP wallboards from Itel and SYMON e Call Detail Recording System Admin Guide Call Detail Recording no keycode required records and reports call activity from the Business Communications Manager You can create reports fr
286. tion 169 polarity TCM connections 168 portable handset DECT 67 portable services supporting regions 259 portable telephone Companion 156 Companion installation 170 DN range 170 Etiquette C3050 CT2 67 extension numbers 170 registration 170 ports base unit ports 43 FEM fiber ports 113 positioning antenna 175 Companion base station 167 power checking voltage 122 Companion RPI cord warning 122 do not fasten cords 122 reconnecting to system 118 removing 116 power bar approval 80 connecting 122 power down system 204 power draw limitation 193 power outage emergency phone jack 58 power supply cables 231 knockout plate 232 LED 230 module LED 234 modules 233 redundant housing 233 replacing 227 Installation and Maintenance Guide 302 Index replacing single source power 227 replacing the module 235 RPI 158 securing in the housing 229 switch 122 update to redundant 230 upgrading 231 power supply bracket 232 power supply bracket screw 231 power up 206 PRI DTM description 39 DTM module 57 line types 262 process map hard disk replacement 209 installing a media bay modules 115 replace single source power 227 replacing memory 246 replacing modules 119 replacing the fan 217 Professional Call Center 46 programming moving telephones 154 programming the Companion 156 proprietary extension cable 171 protective ground 128 129 PSTN line 128 service provider 71 PSU RPI requirements 158 public
287. tion Media Bay Module North American systems only The Analog Station media bay module ASM 8 connects to eight analog telecommunication devices These devices can be standard analog telephones cordless telephones FAX machines answering machines or modems The maximum speed for a modem connection is 28 8 kbit s Figure 20 shows a diagram of the ASM 8 The ASM 8 has one amphenol connector on the faceplate For details about wiring the ASM 8 refer to Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters on page 183 Figure 20 ASM 8 front view Power LED Status LED Amphenol connecto P0937235 02 1 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware 63 Specialized Media Bay Modules This section describes the modules that perform a specific job outside of the trunk and station description Refer to Table 7 e The DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications module allows you to add radio based cordless communication devices to your Business Communications Manager in areas where the DECT technology is available e The Fiber Expansion module FEM provides a fast way of upgrading from an existing Norstar system simply by plugging in Norstar expansion modules to the FEM box Table 7 Specialized modules DECT connects a maximum of eight radio base stations Only available for some profiles Refer DECT Media Bay which receives transmissions from registered to Mobility Services by Region on Module cordles
288. to Table 47 Table 47 Power supply LED a minimum of 1 PS needs N A attention D Indicates state of system power OK N A Older models may not have a Red LED The Business Communications Manager system starts up when you connect the ac power cord This takes several minutes to complete Upgrading to a Redundant Power Supply The redundant power supply allows you to change a failed power supply without turning off the system You can add a redundant power supply to a Business Communications Manager base unit currently equipped with a standard power supply Note A Business Communications Manager expansion unit with a standard power supply cannot be updated You must replace the cabinet Figure 112 provides an overview of the steps required to upgrade your system from a standard power supply to a redundant power supply module Figure 112 Redundant power supply upgrade overview Shut the system Make internal Turn power down connections module switches on Ensure power Set up unit for maintenance module switches are off Remove standard power supply Restore unit to operation Install redundant power supply housing Insert both modules into power supply housing Check power LED P0937235 02 1 Chapter 19 Replacing a Power Supply 231 Removing and the Standard
289. ts 77 fiber ports 113 wiring 144 fiber cable coiling 144 Fiber Expansion media bay module see FEM fiber ports FEM module 113 FIC code 183 fixed set 67 flashing LED 123 frame relay 130 front bezel latch 117 removing 117 front cover see coverplate front cover see front bezel future expansion 73 G green LED 123 218 ground 116 132 194 195 196 Ground symbol 29 grounding strap 203 205 H hand off Companion base station 167 handset standards and specifications 11 hard disk backup warning 209 brackets 212 initialization 213 installing drive 212 redundant install 212 removing 210 replacement 209 replacement notice 209 returning for repair 211 screw locations 210 size 36 wiring locations 210 hardware grounding strap 116 hard disk replacement notice 209 MSC 39 ports 43 remove power to install 116 removing the hard disk 210 replacing modules 119 restart 206 tools 203 tools warning 210 hardware components 36 hearing aid compatible 5 8 hotels LAN CTE application humidity requirements 79 i2050 soft phone overview 47 illustration 180 Industry Canada registration 4 regulations 6 initial parameters 131 Installation and Maintenance Guide 298 Index initialization process overview 51 initializing the system 131 input impedance 184 195 input wiring 163 insertion loss 184 185 insertion loss measurement 185 install ATA2 147 auxiliary ringer 193 base statio
290. udatwede donee onde etbenerideeearane de 170 Installing External Antennas and Lightning Surge Protection 171 Read Before You Install Equipment 0 02 eee eee ee 171 Installing Antennas United States of America 0000055 171 Installing a Lightning Surge Protector USA 00000 eee ee 173 Installation and Maintenance Guide 20 Contents Installing Antennas Canada 0000 cece eee 175 etal DEGT SYSIGWS sasira a A AS 181 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 0 ccs eee eee eee 183 Peers MSGI aironi tlede a R 183 Environmental Requirements 2 3245 6ccs0e85 coh ve say dete esan ced wwew es 183 Operating Requirements 0 0c eect eee 183 Analog Transmission Parameters 0 0c eee ee eee eee 184 North American systems only 2 000 cece eee eee 184 Connecting the Business Communications Manager ATA2 045 186 Mounting the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 20 05 187 Determining the ATA 2 extension number 00 0c cece eee eee 188 Conigurng De ATA 2 pac ccd ee habeas dew hERS DEES MER EERE S MERE GD OS 189 Testing ING AIA 2 cccesnci et ceaciaiwi eee eeh OEE acne ames ada 189 ATA 2 Data LUT MIMI ea Se wo ae nek Sh ke asl hb woe aac aah ade a dle Set ae 190 Data Transmission Requiremenis s45 6ccccdeewad ae adee ang aa deuwne ea dgers 190 FAX and Modem Transmission Compatibility
291. uirements 77 hardware overview 60 wiring chart 142 DSM 16 description see also DSM 40 DSM 32 description see also DSM 40 DTM description 39 57 DIP switch settings 99 101 DS30 channel requirements 77 network standards 5 North American PRI settings 101 wiring chart 139 dual in line memory module see DIMM E E1 DTM modules 57 earphone jack 195 electrical ground requirements 80 electrical requirements 80 electrical shock warning 9 29 80 electromagnetic compatibility 5 emergency numbers programming requirements 8 emergency telephone analog auxiliary jack 58 installing 149 troubleshooting 200 EMI device compliance 7 EMI EMC 9 entering keycodes 136 environment standards and specifications 11 environmental requirements ATA2 183 Business Communications Manager base unit 79 equipment malfunction 6 tools 203 equipment and supplies installation checklist 81 equipment rack 83 89 Ethernet crossover cable 125 131 134 135 ethernet network interface card 40 Etiquette C3050 CT2 portable telephone 67 ETSI specifications 11 European only equipment 63 expansion unit cable 80 check voltage 122 connect base unit 92 DS256 port 92 install in rack 89 install on a flat surface 92 installing media bay modules 115 mounting on the wall 91 overview 40 power supply 236 proximity to base unit 89 redundant power supply 236 removing cables 116 removing the cover 205 removing the front bezel 117 restar
292. ule Combinations This section describes some combinations of trunk and station modules to demonstrate how to fit the modules into the DS30 channel resources These configurations are meant to help demonstrate how your system can be configured using the information in this guide and do not necessarily reflect real life configurations Combining CTMs and 4X16s The 4X16 combination media bay module is a combination of a CTM and a DSM A maximum of four CTMs can fit into a DS30 channel when each is given a different offset Therefore you can combine a maximum of three CTMs with a 4X16 combination module This configuration would occupy two full DS30 channels Which means you can install a maximum of three of these combinations in a Business Communications Manager box with an extension box added to it Table 62 demonstrates this configuration of CTMs and 4X16 modules including the switch settings for each module Table 62 CTMs combined with 4X16 modules Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting 2 DS30 4x16s channel Offset 3 4 CTMs Offset 0 1 and 2 1 CTM8 Offset 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Switch settings for 4X16 Installation and Maintenance Guide 270 Media Bay Module Combinations Fully loaded Setup This section describes a system containing one DSM 32 one DSM 16 two ASM 8s and two DTMs This configuration uses all the DS30 channe
293. ules Figure 13 Rear of modules showing DS256 channel and power connectors DS256 and power connector connector DIP Switches The underside of most modules has a set of DIP switches that set the DS30 channel numbers and offsets used by the module Figure 14 shows the location of the DIP switches on the module The exception to this is the DECT module where the switches are found on the rear of the module Refer to DECT DIP Switches on page 64 For more information about setting DIP switches refer to Chapter 8 Installing Media Bay Modules on page 115 Figure 14 Underside of module showing DIP switches Underside of module Rear of module DIP switches Installation and Maintenance Guide 56 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware Trunk Media Bay Modules You install the trunk media bay modules in the Business Communications Manager base unit or the Business Communications Manager expansion unit The base unit holds a maximum of three media bay modules The expansion unit holds a maximum of six media bay modules Trunk media bay modules connect telecommunications lines to the Business Communications Manager system These are determined by e which lines are available from your telephone service provider e what lines you require for the types of telephones you want to use e budget considerations Table 4 lists the types of trunk media bay modules that are available for the Business Co
294. um of 30 handsets e The CTM8 module uses two offsets You assign the first offset to the module and the second offset is automatically selected This means that you can choose offset pairs 0 1 1 2 or 2 3 Because the module requires two offsets on the same DS30 channel you cannot select offset 3 Refer to CTM8 on page 106 e Not all modules are available to all systems Refer to Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware on page 53 for specifics about each module Note Remember if you have chosen a 3 5 channel split for your system channel 7 is no longer available for media bay modules Assign the media bay modules and DS30 channels in the order shown in Figure 37 on page 97 Note that Station modules are assigned starting with DS30 channel 2 and trunk modules are assigned starting with DS30 channel 7 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings 97 Figure 37 Assigning the modules in a hierarchal order After you choose your modules choose where to Example of a assign them on the DS30 channels P European based setup Example of North American based setup DS30 DN assignment hannels begins with Start DN DS30 cames default 221 channels 2 Station modules are DSM 32 2 assigned in this order Start with the first available DS30 channel a DSM 32 3 DSM 32 DSM 1
295. und rod or series of ground rods If you cannot connect the ground lead to the building ground connect the ground lead to the metal frame of the building The connection must be no more than 2 m 6 5 ft to 3 m 10 ft long You can connect the ground lead to the 120 V ac conduit which is connected to the building ground However Nortel Networks does not recommend using the 120 V ac conduit Route and connect the coaxial cable from the outdoor antenna to the surge protector Route and connect the coaxial cable from the surge protector to the appropriate base station BNC connector Note The total length of the coaxial cables from the outdoor antenna to the base station must not exceed 10 m 33 ft P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 181 Installing DECT systems The DECT system requires a DECT media bay module to allow communication between the DECT handsets and the Business Communications Manager The module installs in the Business Communications Manager base unit or expansion unit A maximum of eight base stations which are distributed throughout the transmission area are connected to the module After this step is complete the handsets are subscribed to the Business Communications Manager system For detailed installation refer to the Business Communications Manager 2 5 DECT Installation and Maintenance Guide Each jack on the DECT module corresponds to an internal port on the DECT modu
296. unications Manager 43 Connection Ports You can connect to the Business Communications Manager base unit through the serial port or through a LAN card to perform the initial system initialization Refer to Figure 7 For initialization information refer to Using a Null Modem Serial Cable on page 131 and Connecting the Ethernet Crossover Cable on page 135 Figure 7 Base unit external points of connection O O O O ooo0o0 8 8 oo o OLE fe oo Fy 5 00000000000 one o of OM Oo o i o o 7 oe eC Je eC ad Ig e o O E oco oCo 00 0 o e Serial LAN Note The other computer access ports currently are not used for Business Communications Manager operations Installation and Maintenance Guide 44 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Business Communications Manager Base Unit LEDs A line of 10 LEDs display on the face of the Business Communications Manager base unit Refer to Figure 8 These LEDs show the current state of various hardware components Figure 8 Business Communications Manager base unit operational LEDs Oi OD OO 0 0 0 Q g PCI devices l de O O O Operational LEDs o O O oO Power Disk Status PCI Devic
297. upplies Note Power supplies for the Business Communications Manager 2 5 system are auto switching power supplies The power supply on an original 2 0 system has a voltage switch that must be set to the correct voltage Cooling fan The Business Communications Manager base unit can have a single cooling fan or a redundant set of fans e Systems prior to Business Communications Manager 2 0 upgraded to redundant power supply systems use a piggy back fan configuration e The new 2 5 version systems have the fan ports side by side Hard disk The Business Communications Manager base unit has a single hard disk Telephony Components The telephony components perform call processing by connecting the telephones or peripheral telephony equipment such as fax machines to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN lines They also process telephony information that has been received through an IP link e MSC The Media Services Card MSC is a PCI card which performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels The Business Communications Manager 2 5 MSC contains two PEC IIIs that provide additional voice channel processing for the MSC Refer to Media Services Card on page 41 Note You can upgrade the PEC Is on your 2 0 system to PEC IIIs gt You cannot mix PEC Is with PEC IIIs e CTM North American systems only The Calling line identification CLID Trunk media bay module CTM connects
298. ure the level at the CO exchange Note The difference in levels is the transmit loss and must be less than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable Installation and Maintenance Guide 186 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters Connecting the Business Communications Manager ATA 2 After you have determined that the proper environment exists you can connect the ATA 2 to the line and set Refer to Figure 75 Figure 75 Single line telephone installation overview ATA 2 power cord P Single line telephone Business Communications Manager g P Central Office BBE ATA 2 Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 1300 ohms maximum Figure 76 shows the pinouts for the connection cables Figure 76 ATA 2 pin outs Line Jack Terminal Jack TCM Ring B Lead TCM Tip A Lead o CEN The TCM input is not polarity sensitive P0937235 02 1 Chapter 13 Installing Analog Terminal Adapters 187 Follow these steps to connect the cable 1 Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 Terminal jack Refer to Figure 77 Figure 77 ATA 2 top view Line jack Terminal jack Power supply connector receptacle a A O N Connect the other end to your telephone modem orFAX Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA
299. urns to the telephone that camped the call Set the length of delay under Feature settings in System programming central answering position CAP An M7324 telephone that provides backup answering and set monitoring Assign a CAP under CAP assignment in System programming channel service unit CSU A device on the Digital Trunk Interface that is the termination point of the T1 lines from the T1 service provider The CSU collects statistics on the quality of the T1 signal The CSU ensures network compliance with FCC rules and protects the network from harmful signals or voltages client A client is a computer system or process that requests a service of another computer system or process For example a workstation requesting the contents of a file from a file server is a Client of the file server cold start A cold start occurs when you lose all system programming such as after a power failure or if the system was down for maintenance and you want to start it up again Companion portable telephone Hand held wireless telephones that allow complete mobility within the reach of Companion base stations or an external antenna Portable telephones provide many but not all standard system features They also share some of the same programming as desk telephones Installation and Maintenance Guide 278 Glossary Companion Wireless The name for the communication systems which use radio technology to transmit and receive sign
300. use this line remains active if a power outage occurs Figure 16 provides a view of the front of the CTM and CTM8 Figure 16 CTM and CTM8 LEDS and jacks Power LED Status LED Line 1 Aux Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 sy 4 Line 5 P0937235 02 1 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware 59 Basic Rate Interface Media Bay Module The Basic Rate Interface media bay module BRI module connects a maximum of four BRI ISDN lines to the Business Communications Manager system European systems use an S interface North American based systems use a T interface with an external NTI line Each BRI ISDN line you connect adds two telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system Therefore each BRI adds a maximum of eight telephone lines to the Business Communications Manager system via the four RJ48C jacks on the faceplate You can also use this module for dial backup or dial on demand services for WAN connections Figure 17 shows a front view of the BRI The LEDs beside each RJ 48C jack are on when the ISDN line is active Figure 17 BRI LEDs and jacks Front view Power LED Status LED Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 60 Chapter 2 Telephony Hardware Station Media Bay Modules Table 6 You install the station media bay modules in the Business Communications Manager base unit or the Business Communications Manager expansion unit The Business
301. ush the PEC down into the slot until it is firmly seated Note Do not force the card into its slot If the PEC does not slide in easily check the alignment 4 Replace the cover 5 Restore the unit to operation Refer to Restarting the System on page 206 Installation and Maintenance Guide 246 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware Replacing Memory The version 2 5 Business Communications Manager base unit comes equipped with 256 MB of Random Access Memory RAM The previous version 2 0 release of the hardware contained 128 MB of RAM In both cases the memory resides on a Dual In line Memory Module DIMM in center of the main printed circuit board This board contains space to add a second DIMM or you can upgrade the existing DIMM Figure 129 provides an overview of the process for replacing or adding memory chips Figure 129 Memory replacement overview Do a software shutdown Set up unit for Install a new maintenance DIMM Restore unit to Remove the top cover operation Test system Pull DIMM off i motherboard Danger Risk of shock AN Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel Networks approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved rep
302. usiness Communications Manager MSC faceplate details __ DS256 jack Auxiliary ringer ___ Page relay ___ Page output 9990 ___ Music on hold input Warning External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer page relay page output A and music on hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage SELV All four interfaces are SELV and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV If these interfaces are not SELV you must use external line isolation units LIU The MSC faceplate offers the following optional connections e DS256 connector The Business Communications Manager expansion unit connects to the Business Communications Manager base unit through the DS256 jack on the MSC faceplate The DS256 cable to make this connection is provided with the purchase of an expansion cabinet e Auxiliary ringer jack The Business Communications Manager base unit uses the auxiliary ringer jack to control the cadence of an auxiliary ringer customer supplied You must use this output in a low current low voltage application only Do not use this output for switching the auxiliary ringer directly Installation and Maintenance Guide 42 Chapter 1 Introducing the Business Communications Manager Page rela
303. ware 36 RPI 160 telephony 39 computer components 36 requirements 69 configuration ATA2 189 null modem cable 132 connecting fan 220 LAN card 126 modem card 128 network 125 WAN card 127 controlled shutdown 204 conventions text 30 cooling fan 217 copyright music source 6 cordless handsets 112 151 coverplate removing 206 coverplate see front bezel CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery 249 CSU disable CTM 4X16 combination module 61 4X16 settings 108 auxiliary jack 139 DIP switch settings 99 104 106 DS30 channel requirements 77 network standards 5 overview 58 wiring chart 139 CTM description of module 39 CTM8 description of module 39 D Danger symbol 29 P0937235 02 1 Index 295 data applications 183 data carrier detect 127 128 129 132 data communication devices 183 191 data networking hardware installing 125 installation process overview 51 modem card 40 data parameters 130 data set ready 127 128 129 132 data terminal ready 127 128 132 data transmission requirements ATA2 190 DB25 cable 128 DB25 connector 127 DECT base stations 63 channel requirements 77 description 40 DIP switch settings 112 DS30 channel hierarchy 96 equipment list 82 installation process overview 51 supporting regions 259 system components 67 dedicated cable 66 default IP address 125 130 135 new telephone 254 subnet mask 130 dial up 130 digital device compliance 9 digital extensions 73 digital ISDN trunk
304. witch settings To assign these lines DS30 Lower Upper channel offset 2 3 4 5 6 Lines 1 4 lines 5 8 eee Eme raRe22A on on on on on 1 219 222 227 230 7 Baia on on on on On 227 230 235 238 a m on Not Not supported supported 0 on on on on on 181 184 189 192 on on on on 1 off 189 192 197 200 3 2 on on on on of 197 200 205 208 ue on Not Not supported supported 5 on on on on on 151 154 159 162 on on on on 1 159 162 167 170 oft gt on on on f On 167 170 175 178 r an Baia on Not Not Fono off supported supported P0937235 02 1 Chapter 7 Media Bay Module Switch Settings Table 18 CTM8 switch settings Continued Select Enter these switch settings To assign these lines DS30 oe 1 2 31a 1516 Lower Upper channel Lines 1 4 lines 5 8 og o 07 on on EEE 121 124 129 132 on on on 1 129 132 137 140 5 off off off gt ia off ena off of 137 140 145 148 3 on on Not Not _off off of _off supported supported a o o o A on ni 91 94 99 102 o Eoia SE on n 9 102 107 110 2 2 n on on on B By 107 110 115 118 3 on on Not Not _off oA of _off supported supported g on 07 on off i oft 61 64 69 72 _ 0 a 69 72 77 80 7 ptt 2 7 3 on on Not Not _off off of _off supported supported If your system is configured with a
305. wn OBIX15 Brown Yellow BS15 Violet Blue Blue Violet Violet Green Green Violet P0937235 02 1 Chapter 12 Installing Companion or DECT Systems 167 Installing Companion Base Stations Before you install wireless equipment ensure that a site planner determines base station locations and records the base station information in a provisioning record Caution You must install all base stations within 1230 m 4000 ft TCM wiring length of the Business Communications Manager system or base station module To optimize seamless hand off the difference in TCM wiring length between neighboring base stations must not exceed 300 m 1 000 ft Before you install or move wireless equipment in the United States check that you have approval from UTAM Inc The United States FCC has appointed UTAM Inc as the body responsible for coordinating and verifying the installation or relocation of unlicensed personal wireless communication devices To comply with UTAM Inc the system uses keys and credits to control user capacity and to ensure system location verification You require these software keys and credits to activate Companion services You purchase these credits at the time you place the order Positioning a Companion Base Station Avoid installing base stations on large concrete or marble columns because these columns affect radio coverage If possible place the base station a minimum of 1 m 40 in from these
306. work layer information and routing tables A router decides which path network traffic follows using routing protocols to gain information about the network and algorithms to choose the best route based on a routing matrix Routing The path a message takes from its origin to its destination on a network or the Internet P0937235 02 1 Glossary 287 Serial port A port that sends and receives data one bit at a time Software keycode Refer to Keycode static IP address A static or fixed IP address that is permanently assigned to a computer Station Auxiliary Power Supply SAPS A device which provides power to a telephone that is more than 300 m 975 ft and less than 1200 m 3900 ft from the server or to a CAP module Station media bay module Physical units installed in a Business Communications Manager that connect the telephone lines to the system subnet mask A value used to route packets on TCP IP networks When the IP layer has to deliver a packet through an interface it uses the destination address contained in the packet together with the subnet mask of the interface to select an interface and the next hop in that subnet synchronous A synchronous signal is sourced from the same timing reference A synchronous signal causes the interval between successive bits characters or events to remain constant or locked in to a specific clock frequency System speed dial code A two digit code 01 to 7
307. y All three types of cards are removed and replaced in the same manner the only difference being which PCI slot they are inserted into For a description of the function of each type of card on the Business Communications Manager system refer to Data Networking Components on page 40 Figure 123 provides a general procedure for card replacement in the PCI slots of the Business Communications Manager server Figure 123 If possible do a software shutdown LAN card replacement overview Remove the card Install the new card in the same slot Set up unit for maintenance Remove the top and front covers Replace the slot cover lock and screw Remove the slot cover lock and screw Restore unit to operation Check LEDs Installation and Maintenance Guide 240 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware Removing a Data Card Five LEDs on the front of the Business Communications Manager base unit indicate PCI card status LAN cards can be inserted any of the first three PCI slots Refer to Figure 124 Table 48 lists the various LED states Note There are four possible profiles for data card placement in the Business Communications Manager base unit Figure 124 shows the configuration for profile 1 Note that theWAN card is connected to the first two PCI LEDs If the data card placement on
308. y configured Norstar system Determining System Capacity After you have selected the modules you require you must ensure that the Business Communications Manager can support all the modules This is determined by the DS30 channel requirements of each module The following sections describe these channels and how you fit your modules into the overall system planning P0937235 02 1 Chapter 4 Selecting the Media Bay Modules for Your System 75 Understanding DS30 Channel Numbers A DS30 channel is a block of virtual pathways On a default system five DS30 channel blocks can be assigned to media bay modules Which block the module is assigned to determines the range of line trunk numbers or extension numbers DNs that can be allocated by the module to the equipment connected to that module The other two blocks are permanently routed to the PEC DSPs to support internal Business Communications Manager functions such as voice mail VoIP trunks and IP telephony functions This configuration is called a 2 6 channel split You can change the DS30 channel allocation to a 3 5 split to accommodate increased IP telephony or VoIP trunk requirements You do this by assigning one of the DS30 channels allotted for modules to the voice data sector It is preferable that this choice gets made at startup When you run the Quick Start Wizard you have an option to change the split Figure 25 shows a model of how the DS30 channels are a subgroup of
309. y jack When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay jack The page relay jack connects a floating relay contact pair The Business Communications Manager base unit uses this jack to control the external paging amplifier Page output jack The Business Communications Manager base unit uses the page output to connect an internally generated voice paging signal to an external paging amplifier customer supplied Music on hold jack The Business Communications Manager base unit uses the Music on hold input to connect an external music source that supplies a signal to held lines music on hold or telephone speakers background music The input source can be any available radio or music source approved for connection to the network For directions on setting up these features refer to Chapter 17 Replacing the Hard Disk on page 209 MSC IP Call Processing Hardware If your system requires a high volume of IP telephones and or more IP trunks than the standard eight trunks you have the option to switch a DS30 channel setting on the MSC from providing service for a media bay module to providing digital processing service for additional IP telephones and or trunks As well to ensure adequate data flow from the system you can increase the number of PEC IIIs to four DS30 channels are internal communication paths Each DS30 channel provides a possible 32 signaling chan
310. your base unit differs ensure that you replace the cards in the same slots they were removed from Not all systems can support all cards Figure 124 Business Communications Manager base unit LAN card LEDs O doce 3 2 Po L oof Ta Lec Je LJB8 00 000 0 0 PCI Device s Table 48 Base unit PCI LED states 1 PCI Device Device is present and the driver is active driver is not running Device is not present WAN Port 1 3 PCI Device Device is present and the driver is active driver is not running Device is not present 5 PCI Device Device is present and the driver is active driver is not running Device is not present Note The MSC is not field replaceable P0937235 02 1 Chapter 20 Replacing Data Cards and Processing Hardware 241 Follow these steps to remove the LAN WAN or modem cards 1 If you still have access to the Unified Manager shut down the system using the Shutdown command For details refer to Shutting Down the System Software on page 204 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Setup the server for maintenance as described in Shutting Down the System Hardware on page 204 3 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Remove the front cover 5 Remove the slot c
311. ystem minimum Windows 95 98 or NT 2000 or the Millennium version Note The ideal display setting for a monitor using Unified Manager is 1280 x 1024 gt Unified Manager is a web based application that runs off the Business Communications Manager base unit computer Therefore you take up minimal space on your computer and you can run multiple applications on your computer We recommend that you use Windows NT or 2000 to ensure optimal performance with the Unified Manager Browser Requirements To use Business Communications Manager Unified Manager you must have e Java Virtual Machine JVM 5 0 build 5 0 0 3188 or greater one of the following web browsers Netscape Communicator 4 5 or greater Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or greater Installation and Maintenance Guide 70 Chapter 3 Auxiliary Requirements If you are using Netscape Communicator set the following parameters Enable Java On Cached document comparison Every time If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer set the following parameters Check for newer versions Every visit to the page Java JIT compiler enabled On Preloading Java class Files On Your Workstation To preload Java class files on your workstation 1 Open Unified Manager from your desktop The first window displays a number of functional buttons Click the Install Client button From the list choose the link to the Java Class for the browser you are using

Avaya BCM 2.5 Installation and Maintenance Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents